JP2011019673A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To improve interests in games by preventing the situation of making it hard to recognize that an advance notice is executed for the variable display of any identifying information in a game machine which is so arranged as to execute a foreseeing advance notice even during the variable display of identifying information in addition to the ongoing specified game state. <P>SOLUTION: A microcomputer 560 for game control discriminates the results of the determination on whether the jackpot or a minor win should be presented or not and on the types of jackpots in response to the winning of starter prizes. When the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, a microcomputer 100 for performance control executes an advance notice performance in ongoing jackpot for any of prescribed counts (for example, four) of reservation memory based on the results of the determination at the prize winning moment. Then, after the end of the jackpot game state, the microcomputer 100 for performance control forbids the execution of the successive advance notice performances until the variable display of a prescribed number of pieces (for example, four) of the identifying information is ended. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention starts variable display of a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified based on the fact that a start condition permitting the start of variable display is satisfied after the game medium passes through the start area, and displays the display result. The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that includes a variable display unit that performs derivation display and enters a specific gaming state based on a display result derived and displayed on the variable display unit being a predetermined specific display result.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result. Are configured to give the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display unit based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display a symbol (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In the variable display section, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time and stop, swing, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In such a gaming machine, there is one configured to execute in advance a notice (pre-reading notice) regarding a symbol change executed after the jackpot game is ended during the jackpot game state (in a specific game state) (for example, , See Patent Document 1). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when a new start win occurs during the big hit gaming state, the game control microcomputer determines whether or not the big win is based on the start win memory data, Whether or not the display mode is a reach mode is determined in advance, whether or not it is a start winning memory that is a target of a big hit notice, and a big hit notice target specifying command is transmitted. The display control microcomputer uses a character or the like in each round during the jackpot gaming state if the start winning memory is a target for the jackpot notice based on the received jackpot notice target specific command. The notification effect that was present is executed.

  In addition, in such gaming machines, there is one configured to execute in advance a pre-reading notice regarding a symbol variation to be executed later during symbol variation (see, for example, Patent Document 2). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2, when a start winning occurs, the game control microcomputer determines whether or not a big win is based on the start winning memory data, and whether or not a probable variable big win is reached. The winning display result specifying command is transmitted to the display control board. Based on the received winning display result designation command, the display control microcomputer generates a big hit or a big hit continuously before the display result of the symbol variation to be determined becomes a big hit. An effect is given to give notice.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-027750 (paragraphs 0091-0106, FIG. 4-5) JP 2005-65900 A (paragraphs 0054-0060, paragraphs 0077-0084, FIG. 6, FIG. 10-11, FIG. 13)

  By combining the gaming machines described in Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2, it is possible to execute a pre-reading advance notice regarding a symbol variation to be executed thereafter during a symbol variation in addition to the big hit gaming state. , Can improve the interest in games. However, if the gaming machines described in Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 are combined as they are, the pre-reading notice is executed during the jackpot game and the jackpot game is terminated, and then the symbol variation that is the subject of the notice starts. There may be a case where a pre-reading notice is executed for the symbol variation to be executed later. Then, it becomes difficult to recognize which symbol variation is being executed, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced.

  Therefore, the present invention recognizes which identification information variable display is being executed in a gaming machine configured to execute the pre-reading notification during variable display of identification information in addition to the specific gaming state. The purpose is to prevent situations that are difficult to play and to improve the interest in games.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a start condition that allows a variable display to start after a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through a start area (for example, the first start winning port 13 and the second start winning port 14). Plural types of identification information (for example, each of which can be identified based on the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed and the game state is not a big hit gaming state) The first special symbol and the second special symbol are started to be variably displayed, and a variable display section (for example, a first special symbol display 8a and a second special symbol display 8b) for deriving and displaying the display result is provided. In a gaming machine that is in a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the display result derived and displayed on the display unit being a predetermined specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), Game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the line and effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the execution of the effect. Specific game state determination numerical data (for example, jackpot determination random number (random R), jackpot type determination random number (random), for determining whether or not to enter the specific game state based on the passing of the game medium 1)) and numerical data extraction means (for example, a part for executing steps S215A and S215B in the game control microcomputer 560) and the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium passes through the start area. For variable display of identification information, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, upper limit number of first reserved memory number and second reserved memory number) 8), which is the total of the above, is a reserved storage means for storing the specific gaming state determination numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means as a reserved storage (for example, a first reserved storage buffer; a second reserved storage buffer). Based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the display result of the variable display of the identification information indicates whether or not to enter the specific game state using the specific game state determination numerical data stored in the holding storage means. Start time determining means (for example, a portion for executing steps S61, S62, and S73 in the game control microcomputer 560) to be determined before the game medium is passed, and when the game medium passes through the start area, Whether or not a specific gaming state is entered using the specific gaming state determination numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means based on And a starting time determining means (for example, a part for executing steps S220 to S223 and S229 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means determines the identification information based on the determination result by the start time determining means. Effect execution control means (for example, a part that executes steps S800 to S803 in the effect control microcomputer 100) that performs control for executing an effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, a change display of the effect symbol), and determination at start-up Prior notice effect execution means (for example, effect) for executing an advance notice effect (for example, a pre-reading notice (a big hit notice effect, a continuous notice effect)) before the variable display of the identification information determined by the means is executed. The part which performs step S8108 in the microcomputer 100 for control. The part which selects the process data for the production during the round according to the production mode of the announcement effect during the big hit in Step S3909 and executes Step S2904. ), And the advance notice effect executing means is one of the predetermined number of on-hold memories stored in the on-hold storage means based on the determination result by the starting time determination means when controlled to the specific gaming state. In the specific gaming state notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect in the specific gaming state as the prior notice effect for the player (for example, the lottery permission determination based on the symbol designation command is executed in step S6503 in the effect control microcomputer 100, and step S3909 is executed. In step S2904, the process data for the in-round effect corresponding to the effect mode of the big hit notice effect is selected and the result of the determination by the start time determining means when the game state is not controlled. On the basis of this, the variable display of the identification information subject to determination by the start-up determination means is executed. In the variable display of the identification information that is started at the time, variable display advance notice effect execution means for executing the variable display advance notice effect as the advance notice effect (for example, based on the variable category command in steps S6012 and S6019 in the effect control microcomputer 100). The determination control unit further determines the continuous notice mode and executes step S8108), and the effect control unit further ends the variable display of the predetermined number of pieces of identification information after ending the specific gaming state. During the variable display (for example, until the end of the fourth variable display after the big hit), the variable display notice effect prohibiting means (eg, the effect) When it is determined as N in step S6008 in the control microcomputer 100, step S6009 and after It characterized in that it comprises a portion) that controls the processing so as not to run. With such a configuration, after the specific game state is ended, the period during which the variable information of the identification information subject to the notice effect during the specific game state by the notice effect execution means during the specific game state may start is The notice display effect during variable display by the variable display notice effect executing means can be prevented from being executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine configured to execute the advance notice effect during the variable display of the identification information in addition to the specific game state, it recognizes which of the identification information variable display is being executed in advance. The situation that becomes difficult can be prevented and the interest in the game can be improved.

  The effect control means corresponds to the notice effect execution means (for example, the notice effect set in step S8004 in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a notice effect other than the prior notice effect (eg, step-up notice or mini character notice). The process data is selected in step S8020 and steps S8022 and S8105 are executed), and after the specific gaming state is ended, until the variable display of the predetermined number of pieces of identification information is ended by the notice effect executing means. A notice effect prohibiting means for prohibiting the execution of the notice effect (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 100 that restricts the notice effect by executing step S8009 when it is determined as Y in step S8008). May be. According to such a configuration, during the period when the variable display of the identification information targeted for the notice effect during the specific game state by the notice effect execution means during the specific game state is likely to be started, The notice effect can also be prevented from being executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to recognize which of the identification information variable displays has been executed in advance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  The start time determining means determines that the specific gaming state is set on condition that the numerical data for determining the specific gaming state stored in the holding storage means matches the specific determination value (for example, the microcomputer 560 for controlling the game) In step S61, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A is met), the specific game state notice effect executing means is for determining the specific game state stored in the holding storage means. On the condition that some of the numerical data is determined to match the specific determination value by the starting determination means, the notice effect during the specific gaming state is executed (for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control is a step). In the lottery permission determination of S6503, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 64, commands C401 (H) to C403 ( On condition that it is receiving a either), determines to permit the drawing in jackpot notice) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notice effect during the specific game state by the notice effect execution means during the specific game state only when it is necessary to improve the interest in the game. It is possible to prevent the processing related to the execution of the notice effect during the specific gaming state by the notice effect execution means during the game state.

  The notice effect executing means during the specific game state executes the notice effect during the specific game state at a predetermined timing (for example, round 10) during the specific game state (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines Y in step S6500). When the determination is made, the processing after step S6501 can be executed to execute the big hit announcement effect), and the effect control means can set the specific determination value by the start time determination means after a predetermined timing in the specific gaming state. When it is determined that they match, when the variable display of the identification information based on the specific game state determination numerical data determined to match the specific determination value is executed, it is executed by the notice effect execution means during the specific game state Common notice effect that executes the notice effect common to the particular game state notice effect (for example, common notice effect during the big hit) Means (e.g., step S8010~8012 in effect control microcomputer 100, portions for performing the S8110) may be configured to include. According to such a configuration, even when the notice effect during the specific game state is not executed by the notice effect execution means during the specific game state during the specific game state, the identification information to be executed after the end of the specific game state. In the variable display, a case where a notice effect common to the notice effect during the specific gaming state is executed can be provided. Therefore, the relevance between the effect in the specific game state and the variable display of the identification information executed after the end of the specific game state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  The game control means transmits a start command transmission means (for example, a symbol designation command, a variation category command) that can specify a determination result of the start time determination means (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command) before the determination by the start time determination means. A part for executing steps S217A and S217B in the gaming control microcomputer 560, and a specified specific gaming state command (for example, a designation indicating that the big prize opening is open for designating round 10) when being controlled to the specific gaming state Command transmission means for transmitting a command) (for example, a portion for transmitting a command for opening a special prize opening that designates round 10 by executing the process of step S305 in the game control microcomputer 560). The production control means is transmitted by the start time command transmission means. Determination result command storage means for storing the content of the determination result command up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 8 which is the sum of the upper limit number 4 of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) (for example, at the time of winning a prize) A determination result storage buffer), and a specific gaming state command transmission means, when a specific gaming state command is transmitted, based on the contents of the determination result command stored in the determination result command storage means, the notice effect in the specific gaming state In a specific gaming state for determining whether or not to execute (for example, the process of steps S6501 to S6509 when it is determined Y in step S3901 in the microcomputer 100 for effect control and Y in step S6500) To determine whether or not to perform the announcement effect during the big hit and the appearance mode), and a specific game The in-game notice effect executing means executes the notice effect in the specific game state based on the fact that the notice effect in the specific game state is determined to be executed by the notice effect determining means in the specific game state (for example, the effect control micro The computer 100 is configured to execute step S2904 by selecting the process data for the in-round effect according to the effect mode of the big hit notice effect in step S3909 according to the determination results of steps S6501 to S6509). Also good. According to such a configuration, the effect control means determines whether or not to execute the notice effect during the specific game state by the notice effect execution means during the specific game state only when the command during the specific game state is transmitted. For example, the notice effect during the specific gaming state can be executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect during the specific game state by the notice effect execution means during the specific game state every time the determination result command is transmitted. The processing load for execution can be reduced.

  The numerical data extracting means is a numerical value for determining the effect mode for determining the effect mode of the effect corresponding to the variable display of the identification information together with the numerical data for determining the specific gaming state based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area. Data (for example, random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), random number for variation pattern determination (random 3)) is extracted (for example, a part for executing steps S215A and S215B in the game control microcomputer 560), and reserved storage The means is for a predetermined upper limit number (for example, an upper limit between the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) for variable display of identification information in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium passes through the start area. Production mode with specific game state determination numerical data extracted by numerical data extraction means, up to 8) which is the sum of Equation 4 The fixed numerical data is stored as a hold memory (for example, a first hold memory buffer and a second hold memory buffer), and the game control means produces an effect stored in the hold memory means based on the start condition being satisfied. Using the aspect determination numerical data and a determination value table (for example, the variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B shown in FIG. 10) in which determination values are set for a plurality of types of performance modes, An effect mode at the time of start in which an effect mode (for example, variation pattern type, variation pattern) corresponding to variable display is determined before a display result of variable display of identification information is derived and displayed from among a plurality of types of effect modes. Determination means (for example, a part for executing steps S91 to S105 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the game medium pass through the starting area. When the game medium passes through the starting area, the presentation mode determination numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means and the determination value are used to perform the presentation corresponding to the variable display of the identification information. Start-up effect mode determination means (for example, a game control micro) that determines whether or not the effect mode is a specific effect mode (for example, a variation pattern type with a super reach, a variation pattern) among a plurality of types of effect modes. The step of executing step S232 in the computer 560), and the variable display notice effect executing means is determined to be the specific effect mode by the start time effect mode determining means, based on the specific effect mode. In the variable display of the identification information that is started before the variable display of the identification information determined to be For example, by executing step S8108 in the production control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing the continuous notice effect of the effect modes shown in FIGS. A common determination value is set for a specific effect mode, regardless of the number of reserved memories stored by the hold storage unit, and the hold storage unit stores the effect mode other than the specific effect mode. Different judgment values are set according to the number of reserved memories (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B and FIG. 79, the total number of reserved memories is 0 to 2 or 3 or more. Regardless of this, a determination value in the range of 230 to 251 is assigned to a variation pattern type (super CA2-7) including a variation pattern with super reach. Different variation values are assigned to variation pattern types including variation patterns with non-reach and normal reach other than super reach depending on whether the total number of pending storage is 0 to 2 or 3 or more. It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when executing the variable display notice effect executing means by the variable display notice effect executing means based on the determination that it becomes a specific effect aspect, there is a mismatch depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the hold storage means. Can be prevented from occurring. In addition, by varying the variable display time according to the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation in which the variable display operating rate decreases.

  The start-time effect mode determination means sets the effect mode of the effect corresponding to the variable display of the identification information on the condition that the numerical value data for effect mode determination stored in the hold storage means matches a predetermined determination value. It is determined that a predetermined production mode (for example, a variation pattern type with a super reach, a variation pattern) that suggests that there is a high possibility that a specific gaming state is set in comparison with the performance mode (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is used). Steps S91 to S105 are executed to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern with super reach), and the effect execution control means identifies the identification information in a predetermined effect mode based on the determination result by the start time effect mode determination means. Can be performed (for example, the microcomputer 100 for controlling the performance in step S8020). The process data corresponding to the motion pattern is selected and steps S8022 and S8105 are executed.) The variable display advance notice effect executing means determines the effect condition determination at start in the effect appearance determination numerical data stored in the hold storage means. The announcement effect during variable display is executed on the condition that there is no data that matches the predetermined determination value other than the numerical data for determining the production mode determined by the means (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 has In the process of step S6012, as shown in FIG. 42, the continuous notice effect is executed on the condition that only the command C600 (H) indicating that it is determined as “non-reach” has been received. (Determined) may be configured. According to such a configuration, the variable display notice effect is recognized by interrupting and executing the variable display of the identification information of the predetermined effect mode during execution of the variable display notice effect by the variable display notice effect executing means. The situation where it becomes difficult can be prevented, and the situation where the interest in the game is reduced can be prevented.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance specific area | region and a holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the determination result memory buffer at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous notice effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous notice effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the combination of the fluctuation category command memorize | stored as a determination result at the time of prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a continuous notice allocation table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prohibition rule of the notice effect at the time of low probability. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prohibition rule of the notice effect for the 1st to 4th change after a high probability and big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prohibition rule of the notice effect for the 5th-62nd change after a high probability and big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prohibition rule of the notice effect for the 63-70th change after a high probability and big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prohibition rule of the notice effect for the time of high probability / low base. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a notice effect determination process during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of permission determination of the lottery of the big hit announcement effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of permission determination of the lottery of the big hit announcement effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of permission determination of the lottery of the big hit announcement effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of permission determination of the lottery of the big hit announcement effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of permission determination of the lottery of the big hit announcement effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the production pattern of the notice effect during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the notice mode distribution table during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a pseudo | simulation ream. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of notice effect during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of the common notice effect during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the period when a continuous notice effect is restrict | limited. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the continuous notice lottery prohibition period. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the continuous notice lottery prohibition period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the allocation state of the determination value in the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another example of the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the judgment value in the fluctuation pattern classification judgment table for deviation when it sees paying attention also to the fluctuation pattern classification including the fluctuation pattern with a pseudo-continuity as a fluctuation pattern other than the fluctuation pattern with a super reach. is there. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification judgment table for deviation | shift when it sees paying attention also to the variation pattern classification containing the variation pattern with a pseudo | simulation series. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of allocation in the range to which the variation pattern classification with super reach is allocated.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect symbol display is performed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling and soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game or battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game or battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red.The display color varies depending on the type of big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit) When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. (The display color is different from the loss. For example, the display color is blue in the case of loss and red in the case of a big hit. The display color may be changed depending on whether it is 5R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit.) The 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off. The display color at the time is desirably a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display color from being assimilated with the background image and disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  Further, on the upper left of the effect display device 9, there is provided a flash lamp 110 used for a big hit notice effect to be described later. In this embodiment, in a predetermined timing (for example, round 10) during the big hit game, when the big hit is already stored in the pending storage, the flash lamp 110 is flashed. The notice effect during the big hit that is turned on for a short time is executed. Therefore, when the flash lamp 110 flashes at a predetermined timing (for example, round 10) during the big hit game, it can be recognized that the big hit is determined again after the big hit game ends. Note that the flash lamp 110 is configured using, for example, a multi-color LED, and can be lit in various display colors such as white, purple, blue, yellow, and rainbow colors.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition. In addition, for example, a hold storage display unit that displays the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order of winning to the first start winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 may be provided. .

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. Therefore, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect or a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. In addition, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as an effect blade accessory) is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 below the left and right and moves when the motor 87 rotates. 79a and 79b are provided. In this embodiment, the production blade actors 79a and 79b operate when a notice production (production blade production notice production) is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, and 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is a high probability state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a variation display result of a special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) However, except for the high probability / low base state described later), the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased. .

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is shifted to a so-called probability change state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is changed to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, a special symbol display). Transition to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that variable display execution conditions in the devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in effect. It becomes easier to win a start. In this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is always shifted to the probability change state. However, when the big hit is made, the game may be shifted to a so-called short-time state in addition to the probability change state. A machine may be configured. In this case, the high base state may be shifted even in the short time state.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is won increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state increases, and the start winning state becomes easy (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. A random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 is configured to select a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit selection selection function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 includes the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board, the flash lamp 110, and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. In addition to performing display control, sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( An effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to the effect control INT signal. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100 and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal going from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED and the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED / lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED / lamp driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED and the lamp. Further, current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 and the flash lamp 110 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (such as CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the on state, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, high probability flag, high base flag, etc.), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output) Port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). In addition, the CPU 56 gives a display result designation command designating the display result (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80. It transmits to (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variable time timer value is resumed, and the special symbol fluctuation display is resumed and saved. When the value of the variable time timer that has been timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value to be described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state is not in a state, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls itself a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the gaming machine. In the process of sending a command signal to control other microcomputers, or the game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of the sudden probability variation big hit, the reach probability sudden hit symbol (for example, “135”) is not reached but reached. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag for normal symbol fluctuation is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the normal symbol fluctuation speed every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. In addition, the CPU 56 executes a normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in the case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Eventually, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9 (in the case of a sudden probability big hit) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely It is a big hit that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big hit game is shifted to a probable state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit types are all probability change big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability change big hit, 10R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit), It is not necessary to provide it. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits, it is preferable to provide a sudden probable big hit that does not involve a high base state only by shifting to a high probability state. . However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the ratio of the super reach when the high probability / low base state is set at the time of the 71st variation display after the end of the big hit game is increased. In the case of providing a sudden probability variation jackpot with a high probability / low base state, a high probability is obtained in all the variation displays until the variation display of the 71st rotation is terminated after the big hit game with the sudden probability variation jackpot is terminated. / Because it is in the state controlled to the low base state, the ratio of super reach becomes high in all the change displays until the probability variation state ends. Therefore, in the case of providing a sudden probability variation big hit that becomes a high probability / low base state, the ratio of the super reach in the high probability / low base state is not necessarily increased every time, but it becomes a super reach. You may make it provide the time of raising a ratio, and the time of not raising (it is a normal ratio). Also, for example, instead of looking at the gaming state (for example, whether or not a high probability flag or a high base flag is set), the number of times of variation display after the big hit game is counted, and the 71st variation display is obtained. Only occasionally you may increase the percentage of superreach. With such a configuration, when a sudden probability change big hit that becomes a high probability / low base state is provided, after the big hit game by the sudden probability change big hit is finished, the super reach of each time is displayed until the end of the probability change state. It is possible to prevent a state in which the appearance rate is continuously increased.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 and super PB3-1 to super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 6, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used when the reach is not performed and is accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when suddenly probable big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, the re-variation is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, regarding the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, which will be described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B are included. It may be divided into variation pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence or absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of 15R probability variation per unit, 10R probability variation per unit, 2R probability variation per unit, normal CA3-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and normal reach They are classified into normal CA3-2, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations, and super CA3-3, which is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of a small hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that does not involve reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that does not involve reach but has a specific effect. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of a shortened variation without reach and specific production, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation. -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted to a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is increased, and also to a high base state, There are two cases: a case where only the probability state is transferred and a state where the high base state is not transferred (ie, the low base state). Is used in the probability variation big hit determination table, and in other cases the normal big hit determination table is used. As will be described later, in this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is shifted to a high probability state and a high base state after the big hit game is finished. After the big hit, the probability variation state continues until the variation display is terminated 71 times. However, after the big hit, the high base state is ended when the variable display is ended 70 times, and is shifted to the low base state, and only the high probability state is continued until the variable display is ended 71 times. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the big hit, from the end of the 70th fluctuation display to the end of the 71st fluctuation display, only the high probability state is transferred, and the high base state is transferred. There may be a certain probability change state (which is a low base state).

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is transitioned to the probable state, a small hit is generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not it will be probable, the current game state is in the probable state. On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if the second special symbol is displayed so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display, if the gaming state is in a probable state, the small hit is unlikely to occur, and the roaring effect for the probable change is not performed more than necessary. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, which will be described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the stored memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, This table is referred to in order to determine one of “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, eight determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In the jackpot type determination table 131b, two judgment values are assigned to “sudden probability variation jackpot” (a ratio of 2/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “suddenly probable big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “suddenly probable big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, a sudden probability variation big hit as a first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of game value is given and an amount larger than the game value As the second specific gaming state to which the game value is given, 15 rounds of probability variation jackpot “15R probability variation jackpot”, 10 rounds probability variation jackpot “10R probability variation jackpot” and 2 rounds probability variation jackpot “2R probability variation jackpot” may be determined. In addition, there is a case where it is determined that the first specific gaming state is determined at a high rate when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the game value to be given is shown in this embodiment. The number of rounds is not limited. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specified gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and an effect in a manner that encourages whether or not the big hit continues (so-called rank-up bonus effect) You may make it perform. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the types of big hits include “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” and “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, the case where the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is three types of 15 rounds, 10 rounds and 2 rounds is shown. It is not limited to those shown in the form. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a 7-round jackpot game and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a 5-round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, there are four types of jackpot types: “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. Instead, for example, five or more types of jackpot types may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than four types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “15R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state, and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “10R probable big hit” is a big win that is controlled to a 10-round big hit gaming state, and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, a high probability state and a high base are set. The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “2R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the probability changed state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high base The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  Note that “2R probability change big hit” is a big hit that allows only two (2 rounds) opening of the big prize opening as in the case of “sudden probability change big hit” described later. The opening time of the big prize opening per round is long (29 seconds in this embodiment). Therefore, in the case of “suddenly promising big hit”, which will be described later, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the big winning opening during the big hit game, but in the case of “2R probable big hit”, the big winning Although the number of times the mouth is opened is small, it can be expected that the game ball will win the big prize mouth during the big hit game.

  The “sudden probability variation big hit” is the number of times that the special winning opening is less than the “15R probability variation big hit” or “10R probability variation big hit” (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). The jackpot allowed up to. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” have a long opening time of 29 seconds per round, whereas “sudden probability variation big hit” takes one round. The opening time of the winning jackpot is as short as 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a winning prize during the big hit game. And in this embodiment, after the sudden probability change big hit gaming state, it shifts to the probability change state (in this embodiment, it shifts to the high probability state and also shifts to the high base state. (See S166 to S169). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big prize opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, and the big hit gaming state by “suddenly probable big hit” Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the fun of the game is improved. As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit types are all probability change big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability change big hit, 10R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit), It is not necessary to provide it. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits, it is preferable to provide a sudden probable big hit that does not involve a short-time state only by shifting to a high probability state. However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the ratio of becoming super reach when executing the 71st fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game is increased. When the big hit is configured, the ratio of becoming super reach is not necessarily increased every time in the 71st fluctuation display, but when the ratio of becoming super reach is increased and not increased (the normal ratio is maintained). May be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a state in which the appearance rate of super reach becomes permanently high in the 71st variation display after the end of the big hit.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values that are compared with a random 1 value and correspond to "15R probability variation big hit", "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit", and "sudden probability variation big hit", respectively. Judgment value (big hit type judgment value) is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matching jackpot type determination value.

  9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random value (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “10R probability variable big hit” or “2R probability variable big hit”, and when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”. 9B is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 9B in the assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. In addition, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types according to the jackpot type. Accordingly, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, the variation pattern type determination If the value of the random number (random 2) is 150 to 251, it can be seen that the variable display accompanied by at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for 10R / 2R probability variation big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for 15R probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream and super reach In addition, a variation pattern type that does not involve pseudo-continuations is assigned.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit” A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, when the control is suddenly probable big hit state, the big hit state with 15R probable big hit, 10R probable big hit or 2R probable big hit The variation pattern type can be determined differently from the case of control.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10D are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among these, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss that is used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern for loss used when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (a state from the end of the big hit until the end of the 70th variation display) in the probability variation state. A type determination table 135C is shown. FIG. 10D shows a high probability / low base state in which the gaming state is a probabilistic state (a state from the end of the 70th variation display to the end of the 71st variation display after the big hit) Shows a variation pattern type determination table 135D for loss used in the case of The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D have a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is an off-design. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of

  As shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D, in this embodiment, even when the probability variation state is present, if the last 71st variation display is performed after the big hit, before that, Compared to the case where the 70th variation display is performed, the variation pattern with super reach is selected more frequently. By doing so, in this embodiment, the expectation for the player's jackpot at the end of the probability variation state is made by performing the super reach variation display with a high probability in the last variation display where the probability variation state ends. The feeling is raised. Not only the last 71st variation display, for example, increasing the ratio of super reach from the variation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, 5 times before) to the last variation display, etc. Super reach variation display may be performed with high probability over a plurality of variation displays.

  In this embodiment, after the big hit, the high probability state continues until the 71st variation display ends, and the high base state continues until the 70th variation display ends. Thus, in the 71st variation display in the final probability variation state, the case where the high probability / low base state is controlled is shown, but the high base state is continued until the 71st variation display is completed. In the 71st variation display at the end of the probability variation state, the high probability / high base state may be controlled. However, if controlled in this way, in this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for detachment are selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag in the variation pattern setting process, as will be described later. (Refer to Steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). However, since the 71st variation display at the end of the probability variation state remains in the high probability / high base state, the state of the flag is confirmed in this way. It becomes impossible to select the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D. Thus, in the case of controlling to the high probability / high base state even in the 71st variation display in the final probability variation state, the values of the high probability count counter and the high base count counter, which will be described later, are confirmed, and the counter value If the remaining is once, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D is selected. If the counter value is still 2 or more, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for deviation is selected. Good.

  Further, when the ratio of the super reach is increased from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) to the last fluctuation display, for example, a high probability number described later at the end of the big hit Set the counter and the high base number counter to 75 times (for example, set both the high probability number counter and the high base number counter to 75, and the high probability / high base state until 75 times of variable display is completed. The high probability count counter is set to 75 and the high base count counter is set to 70. From the 5th change before the probability change state ends to the last change display, the high probability / low It is also possible to control to the base state.In the case of controlling to the high probability / low base state from the 5th change before the probability change state ends until the last change display. In this case, according to the same control as that shown in this embodiment, the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D may be selected by checking the high probability flag and the high base flag (step S95, S96, S100, S101))) At the start of the variable display, whether or not the value of the high probability count counter and the high base count counter is within a predetermined number (for example, 5) or not (the remaining number of probability variation states) Is within the predetermined number of times), and if it is within the predetermined number (for example, 5), the variation pattern type determination table 135D for detachment with the increased super reach ratio shown in FIG. If the value of the counter is still greater than a predetermined number (for example, 5), the deviation variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. It may be selected to 135C. In addition, the control method in the case where it is configured to increase the ratio of the super reach from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, 71 is set in the high probability count counter in the same manner as in this embodiment, and conversely, 66 is set in the high base count counter. Is controlled to a high probability / low base state, and by confirming whether the value of the high probability count counter is within 5 or less, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss are selected. May be. Further, the number of fluctuations after the big hit may not be determined based on the count value of the high probability number counter or the high base number counter, but may be determined using another counter. For example, a counter that counts the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is provided, and whether the count value of the counter is within a predetermined range (for example, 71 to 75 or 66 to 71) is confirmed. It may be determined whether or not the state is between five changes before the end of the state and the last change display, and the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss may be selected (the probability change state is ended). For example, the configuration may be configured in such a manner that the selection ratio of the super reach is increased only once in the last variation display. For example, the counter value for counting the number of variations after the big hit game is 71, for example, In such a case, the shift variation pattern type determination table 135D may be selected. In addition, when the configuration is such that the high-probability / low-base state is controlled from the change display a predetermined number of times before the probability change state ends (for example, five times before) to the end of the last change display. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for detachment may be selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). ).

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> B to 135 </ b> D are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is shown. However, the common deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used in the case of the high base state and in the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. In the example shown in FIG. 10C, the common high base deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of reserved storage, but the high base deviation variation pattern is used. As the type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for deviation corresponding to the total number of pending storages (tables with different ratios of determination values) may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of the pending storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, for example, a variable display result without a reach, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, as shown in this embodiment. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) that is used when the big hit is not a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. Depending on whether it is a normal state, you may make it use the variation pattern type determination table for big hits prepared separately, respectively. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern for shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3, (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example) If the variation pattern type of shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss, and the gaming state is a high base state, the case of 1 or 2 having a smaller total number of pending storage However (or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is smaller 0 or 1), the shortening variation pattern type determination table is selected to determine the variation pattern of the shortening variation. There may be cases where there are cases.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the variation pattern type includes a normal CA3-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-ream. A case is shown in which a normal CA3-2 is classified into a normal CA3-2 and a super CA3-3, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with superreach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream together with superreach). In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a non-reach variation pattern, and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with reach. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2 and a special PG 1-2 that have a specific effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “out of range”. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H), and the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, a jackpot start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change jackpot start designation command is used. Specifically, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, or “2R probability variation big hit”, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and “sudden probability variation big hit” or “small In the case of “hit”, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start command (A002 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of the big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a command for opening a special winning opening that designates round 10 (A10A (H)). A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening is opened (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, for ending the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “15R probability variable big hit”, “10R probability variable big hit”, or “2R probability variable big hit” is ended. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for sudden probability variation big hit end designation in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which an effect control command indicating that the number of reserved memories has increased or decreased is transmitted for each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. You may make it transmit the production control command which designates itself. In this case, for example, an effect control command for designating which one of the first start prize opening 13 and the second start prize opening 14 has been won is transmitted, and the reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is designated as the first. You may make it transmit a common production | presentation control command by 1 reserved memory number and 2nd reserved memory number.

  Further, for example, separate presentation control commands (holding memory number designation commands) may be transmitted when the first holding memory number is designated and when the second holding memory number is designated. In this case, for example, as a reserved memory number designation command, a value that can specify the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number as MODE data (for example, “C0 (H) when designating the first reserved memory number) ”And“ C1 (H) ”in the case of designating the second reserved memory number), an effect control command in which the value of the reserved memory number is set as EXT data may be transmitted.

  Also, for example, if the same first reserved memory number is specified, an effect control command specifying addition or subtraction of the first reserved memory number is transmitted by making the MODE data common and different EXT data. You may do it. For example, when the common MODE data “C0 (H)” is used and the subtraction of the first reserved memory number is designated, the command C000 (H) is transmitted, and the addition of the first reserved memory number is designated. The command C001 (H) may be transmitted. Further, when specifying the second reserved memory number, the MODE data is changed, and when specifying the subtraction of the second reserved memory number, the command C100 (H) is transmitted. When adding is designated, the command C101 (H) may be transmitted.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning time determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning time determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 22), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit or the small hit or a value for designating the type of the big win is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “10R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “2R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command) in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is being used, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range of the determination value, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / high base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs variation with “08 (H)” set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / low base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 79. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA 2-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation in which “0A (H)” is set in the EXT data. A category 11 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0B (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA2-7). Send a variable category 12 command.

  Even when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. Good. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined at the start winning that it becomes “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether or not 1 to 74. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Determine whether or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variable category 25 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big win at the start winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 fluctuation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 9 and 10), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, or super CA3-3, the continuous notice effect described later is executed for the variation display determined at the time of winning. Only when it is determined that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 are the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, (Variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other variation pattern types. Further, if it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  Note that the “continuous notice effect” is a notice effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. However, it is not always necessary to execute the notice effect over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the notice effect is performed in one variable display before the start of the variable display targeted for the notice effect. There may be. Also, for example, the notice effect is started from the change display before the start of the change display targeted for the notice effect, and the notice effect is displayed until the change display immediately before the change display targeted for the notice effect. It may end, or it may perform a notice effect over the variable display that is the subject of the notice effect. In addition, it is not always necessary to continuously execute over a plurality of variable displays. For example, a notice effect may be executed in a variable display of a plurality of times intermittently every other time or every second time.

  In this embodiment, regardless of the game state (for example, whether the game is in a high probability state or a high base state, whether or not a big hit game is being played) The winning determination process is executed, the symbol designating command shown in FIG. 15 is always transmitted, and the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is transmitted. Then, based on the received symbol designation command and variation category command, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit or reach is reached before the variation display of the notice target is started. Execute a pre-reading notice. In this embodiment, there are two types of pre-announcement effects as a pre-reading notice: a continuous notice effect and a big hit notice effect. If there is, it is possible to execute a notice effect during the big hit as a pre-reading notice. Note that “notice effect during jackpot game” is already stored at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game (in round 10 in this embodiment) prior to the start of the variable display subject to the notice effect. It is a notice effect that is executed on condition that there is a big hit in the reserved storage being made. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game notice effect is executed, it is recognized that there is a thing that has already been determined to be a big hit in the variable display executed after the big hit game ends. Can do.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, with regard to the continuous notice effect, whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect is determined mainly based on the variable category command, and the continuous notice effect is executed during the variable display. The Also, with regard to the jackpot announcement effect, the presence / absence of execution of the jackpot announcement effect and the presentation mode are determined mainly based on the symbol designation command, and the jackpot is given at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game (round 10 in this embodiment). Medium notice effect is executed.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 on the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8 a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the production components such as the device 9, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the production control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

  18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process as described later. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 30), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening process (step S305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed every round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a command for opening a special winning opening that designates round 10 (A10A (H)).

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and when all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, processing for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. When all the openings have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process in step S312. FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold port number). Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S212A) and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S213A). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S214A).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning opening 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 21A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 21A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 21A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 21A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the first 2. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the starting winning port 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) (see FIG. 21B). Step S215A). In the process of step S215A, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (when starting winning a prize) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 21B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing a random number or the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 21B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes prize-winning effect processing for preliminarily determining the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected winning prize is subsequently executed (step S216A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a winning determination result designation command (design designation command and variation category command) to the presentation control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning presentation process (step S217A), and Control is performed to transmit the 1 reserved memory number addition designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S218A).

  By executing the processing of step S217A, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state), the CPU 56 Every time a start winning is made at the first start winning opening 13, both the symbol designating command and the variation category command are always transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). Whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S212B), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S213B). Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specific area) (step S214B).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) (see FIG. 21B). Step S215B). In the process of step S215B, random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect processing (step S216B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a winning determination result designation command (design designation command and variation category command) to the presentation control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning presentation process (step S217B). Control is performed to transmit the 2-hold storage number addition designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S218B).

  By executing the processing of step S217B, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state), the CPU 56 Every time a start winning prize is awarded to the second start winning opening 14, both the symbol designating command and the variation category command are always transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the case where the first start port switch passing process and the second start port switch passing process are realized as separate processing routines has been described. However, the first start port switch passing process and the second start port The switch passage processing may be realized by a common processing routine.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S216A and S216B. In the winning effect process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S215A and S215B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small win is made, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number is. By doing so, the variation display result and variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. A continuous notice effect for notifying that it will be a big hit or super reach is displayed during the change display of the effect symbol by 100. Further, as will be described later, based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a big hit notice effect during the big hit game (not including suddenly probable big hit).

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state. High probability / high base state and high probability / It is confirmed whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S215A and S215B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable change state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the change display based on the starting winning is actually started. If the 15R probability variation big hit, the 10R probability variation big hit, the 2R probability variation big hit, or the sudden probability variation big hit occurs before, the normal state changes to the probability variation state. For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) are not necessarily the same.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S215A and S215B and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination value, and it is confirmed whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing (see step S216A) in the first start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 20A). Is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. Further, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when a winning effect process (see step S216B) is executed in the second start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 20B), FIG. It is determined whether or not the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set in step S225). Whether or not). In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are set in step S225 at the time of starting winning, until the display of fluctuation based on the starting winning is actually started, Multiple variable displays may be executed. Therefore, the game state after the start winning is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is in the high probability state and the high base state until the actual display of variation based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a 15R probability variation big hit, a 10R probability variation big hit, a 2R probability variation big hit, or a sudden probability variation big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation may change from a normal state to a probability variation state). For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) are not necessarily the same.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 219. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 219 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 219 (that is, if it is 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “0A (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “0B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 214 or less (ie, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the example of threshold determination described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, the threshold value is not within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the previous threshold value. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined as 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79 may be determined. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It can be determined whether or not it is “out of” or “out of super reach”.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y of step S223), the CPU 56 uses the EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “small hit” as a symbol designating command. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251, and determines that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251) in step S 232 described later. It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S215A and S215B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing (see step S216A) in the first start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 20A). The jackpot type is “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit” using the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a shown in FIG. ] Is determined. Further, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when a winning effect process (see step S216B) is executed in the second start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 20B), FIG. Using the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b shown in FIG. 8 (E), the jackpot type is any one of “15R-probable big hit”, “10R-probable big hit”, “2R-probable big hit”, or “Sudden-probable big hit”. Determine whether it will be.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “01 (H)” indicating “15R probability variation big hit” to the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “10R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “10R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “2R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “2R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that the “sudden probability change big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “04 (H)” indicating the “sudden probability change big hit” to the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot classification determined by step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when determining that “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (that is, 150 to 251), it is determined to set “12 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “15R probability variation big hit”, the threshold values 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “suddenly probable big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S215A and S215B to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. A process of setting any value of (H) "to" 18 (H) "to the EXT data of the variable category command is performed.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the determination of the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be performed. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . For example, although the production control microcomputer 100 does not specifically show which variation pattern type, the variation indicated that it will be one of the big hit variation pattern types. A continuous notice effect described later may be executed based on the reception of the category command.

  23 and 24 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. If the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the customer waiting demonstration is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  In step S51, the CPU 56 does not check the value of the total reserved memory number, but checks whether or not data is set in the first area of the reserved specific area. If it is not set, it may be determined that there is no reserved storage, and the process may proceed to step S51A.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 21A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is performed for one special symbol or the special symbol process is performed for the second special symbol (step S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the first special symbol changes in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls win the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Although the case where it is displayed is shown, you may comprise so that a variable display of any one of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed preferentially. In this case, for example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second starting winning port 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated. The special symbol variation display may be executed with priority.

  In the case where the display is performed with priority on the variation display of the second special symbol, in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. 22, the value of the random number for determining the big hit (random R) is determined as the big hit in the low probability state. Only the process of comparing with the value may be executed and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is executed, and the processes of steps S221 and S222 are performed) You may not do it). With such a configuration, when the display is performed with priority on the variation display of the second special symbol, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1, and sets the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area in. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory number buffer are displayed. shift.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3 and 4 in order. In addition, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, when the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating the high base state is set, the CPU 56 sets the high probability high base state background. Controls sending specified commands. Further, when only the high probability flag is set and the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a high probability low base state background designation command. Further, when neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is given. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the effect control microcomputer in the order of the background designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved memory number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. 100 will be transmitted. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, the display result designation command is transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, and after 4 ms has elapsed. A pending storage count subtraction designation command is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 determines the big hit that has been extracted in step S215A of the first start opening switch passage processing or step S215B of the second start opening switch passage processing and previously stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, executes the process of determining the big hit or the small hit It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the probability that the game state is a big hit than when the gaming state is non-probability change state (normal state) Is configured to be high. Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the value on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state is determined by whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (71 in this embodiment).

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“15R probability variable big hit”, “ "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit" or "sudden probability variation big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type that is extracted in step S215A of the first start port switch passing process or step S215B of the second start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “10R positive variable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “2R probability variable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “04” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. Is done.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as the special symbol stop symbol To do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “2R probable big hit” is decided, “3” is designated as a special symbol stop symbol. If “10R probability variation big hit” is decided, “7” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and if “15R probability variation big hit” is decided, “9” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. . When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated with each other in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9A) as tables used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D as a table used to determine the variation pattern type from among a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). The high base flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, and is reset when the high base state is ended. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Further, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (70 times in this embodiment).

  If the high base flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S96). If the high probability flag is not set (N in Step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storage is 3 or more (Step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 10A) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for detachment as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table used for this purpose, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D (see FIG. 10D) is selected (step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high base flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (in this embodiment, the low probability / high base state is controlled). Therefore, if the high base flag is set, a high probability / high base state is established), and the CPU 56 uses the variation for outlier as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. The pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S101). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S101 is executed, and the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of the shortening variation may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in the high probability / high base state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage ( Although the table is different from that shown in FIG. 10B, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is the high base state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1), The change display of the shortening change may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and performs the processing of steps S92, S94, S98, S99, S100, or S101. By referring to the selected table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 10) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 10). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In consideration of a decrease in the execution ratio of the notice effect, as shown in this embodiment, “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. It is preferable that a continuous notice effect is performed by determining in advance whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 6 designation) (see FIG. 13) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S118. When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Specifically, whether or not it is “15R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “10R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not it is “10R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “2R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S115 and S116). Specifically, whether or not it is “2R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “03”. it can. Then, when it is neither “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit” (that is, when it is “sudden probability variation big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command. This is performed (step S117).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S118). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 6 designation command (step S119). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S118), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S120).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S121).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S122 described later. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag may be set, and in step S121, it may be confirmed whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. That's fine.

  Next, if the reserved memory number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number subtraction designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S125). When the variable time timer times out (step S126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag indicating the high probability state and the high base flag indicating the high base state if set (step S132). ), A control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type is “15R-probable big hit”, “10R-probable big hit”, “2R-probable big hit” or “suddenly promiscuous big hit” is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (big hit type (Data stored in the buffer).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, “15R probability change big hit” is 15 times. “10R probability change big hit” is 10 times. “2R probability change big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”. (In this case, twice.) Is set (step S135). The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. In this case, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit and 2R probability variation big hit, although the same two times are set as the number of rounds, different round times are set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, the round time is set to 0.1 seconds, and in the case of 2R probability change big hit, the round time is set to 29 seconds. Note that 29 seconds is set as the round time even in the case of 15R probability variation big hit or 10R probability variation big hit. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S137). When the high probability flag is set (that is, when the probability variation state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state)), the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high probability state is indicated. The value of the high probability count counter is decremented by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the high probability count counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag (step S140). If the high probability flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S141.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S141). When the high base flag is set (that is, in the case of high probability / high base state), the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high base state is decremented by -1 ( Step S142). Then, when the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 56 resets the high base flag (step S144). Then, the process proceeds to step S145. If the high base flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S145.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S147). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start preprocessing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and “sudden probability sudden big hit” Is transmitted with a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (command A302 (H)). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 sets a high probability flag to shift the gaming state to the high probability state (step S166). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 71 times) in a high probability number counter for counting the number of times of display of fluctuation in the high probability state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets the high base flag and shifts the gaming state to the high base state (step S168). In addition, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) in a high base number counter for counting the number of times of change display in the high base state (step S169).

  Note that, by executing the processing of steps S166 to S169, after the big hit game is finished, the state is shifted to the high probability / high base state, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the variable display is finished 70 times. Then, after the end of the big hit, the transition to the high probability / low base state is made from the end of the 70th variation display to the end of the 71st variation display. Return to.

  In this embodiment, the high base flag set in step S168 is also used to determine whether to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, in the normal symbol process (see step S27), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag is set when the normal symbol variation display result is a hit, If it is set, control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 15 by extending the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. The high base flag set in step S168 is used to determine whether or not to shorten the special symbol variation time. In addition, in the case of a configuration that can be controlled even in the normal symbol variation state with an increased probability of winning the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol, the high base flag determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit. Also used to determine.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S170).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer in the form of a ring buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  33 to 37 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 0 (step S614A). If the value of the effect control process flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S615 as it is. If the value of the effect control process flag is not 0 (that is, if the transition is made to a process other than the variation pattern command reception waiting process during the effect control process described later), the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S801) (step S614B). In this embodiment, in the effect control process described later, the change time specified by the received change pattern command is measured, and the effect display device 9 displays the effect symbol change display. In this case, if the fluctuation time is mistakenly recognized, there will be a situation in which the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is continuously executed even though the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has ended. There is a fear. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the next variation pattern command is received when the processing is shifted to a process other than the variation pattern command reception waiting process (for example, the process of effect design variation), the variation pattern is compulsorily changed. By controlling to shift to the command reception waiting process, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation where the effect using the effect display device 9 becomes unnatural. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the state where the effect is shifted so that the change display of the effect symbol is continuously executed even if the change display of the special symbol has already been finished does not occur. be able to. This also applies to other processes for forcibly shifting the process in the command analysis process (see steps S621A, S621B, S623A, S623B, S663B, and S663C). In addition, when controlling to forcibly shift the process in this way, control is performed so that the stop symbol of the effect symbol that has already been determined is stopped and displayed at the timing of the process transition. However, in the case of steps S621A, S621B, S623A, S623B (when a big hit start designation command is received during processing other than the big hit display processing), it is a time to shift to the big hit gaming state, so the stop symbol of the effect symbol Without stopping the display, it is possible to proceed directly to the big hit display process and immediately start the fanfare effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  The effect control CPU 101 sets a continuous notice prohibition flag for prohibiting execution of a process for determining a continuous notice effect, which will be described later, and sets a continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer for measuring the prohibition period for a predetermined time ( For example, 32 ms, if the time from receiving the variation pattern command to receiving the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (8 ms) is sufficient, for example, 28 ms, not limited to 32 ms. In addition, for example, when the timer interrupt process is performed every 2 ms, it may be set to 30 ms (step S616A). In other words, in this embodiment, even if the variation pattern command is received and the variation display of the production symbol is started, the determination of the continuous announcement production is prohibited until a predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) elapses, and the continuous announcement production is performed. Not started. By controlling in such a manner, the continuous notice effect is not determined from the time when the change pattern command is received until at least the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received. This prevents a situation where an unnatural production is produced due to a gap between the two. The continuous notice lottery prohibition period set in step S616A will be described later (see FIGS. 77 and 78).

  In this embodiment, 32 ms (for example, one frame from the start of the change of the production symbol is provided with a slight margin in the time from reception of the variation pattern command to reception of the reserved memory count subtraction designation command. In this example, the time required for changing the design of the symbol is set in the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer, but the time required for receiving the reserved memory number subtraction designation command after receiving the change pattern command (8 ms) ) May be set in the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer.

  Further, in this embodiment, a continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer is set, and the continuous notice prohibition flag is reset based on the time-out of the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer, as will be described later, and the determination of the continuous notice effect is prohibited. Although the state is to be released, the continuous notice prohibition flag is reset based on the receipt of the reserved memory number subtraction designation command without using the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer, and the determination of the continuous notice effect is prohibited. You may make it cancel a state.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which control is performed so that execution of the determination of the continuous notice effect is prohibited until a predetermined period elapses after receiving the variation pattern command. However, the variation pattern command is received. Control is performed to prohibit the execution of the continuous notice effect for the winning determination result shown in the winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) received after the predetermined period of time elapses. May be.

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 sets a display result designation command reception flag (step S618A). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618B).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the value of the effect control process flag is 4 (step S621A). ). If the value of the effect control process flag is 4, the process proceeds to step S622 as it is. If the value of the effect control process flag is not 4 (that is, if the transition is made to a process other than the jackpot display process during the effect control process described later), the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect control process flag. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S621B). In other words, in this embodiment, when a jackpot start designation command is received when the process is shifted to a process other than the jackpot display process (for example, a process of changing the design symbol), the process forcibly shifts to the jackpot display process. By controlling in this way, the situation where the effect using the effect display device 9 becomes unnatural is prevented as much as possible. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 4. Confirm (step S623A). If the value of the effect control process flag is 4, the process proceeds to step S624 as it is. If the value of the effect control process flag is not 4 (that is, if the transition is made to a process other than the jackpot display process during the effect control process described later), the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect control process flag. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S623B). In other words, in this embodiment, when a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command is received when the process is shifted to a process other than the big hit display process (for example, during the effect symbol variation process), the big hit is forcibly performed. By controlling to shift to the display process, a situation in which an effect using the effect display device 9 becomes unnatural is prevented as much as possible. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command reception flag (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (command A301 (H)) (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S652). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S653).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S654), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S655). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory display unit 18d according to the updated second reserved memory number (step S656).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S658). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S659).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S660), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S661). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory display unit 18d according to the updated second reserved memory number (step S662).

  In steps S652, S653, S655, S656, S658, S659, S661, and S662, the reserved memory count and the reserved memory display are not immediately updated on the basis of the reception of the command. When the command is received, it may be confirmed whether or not the continuous notice prohibition flag is set. If the continuous notice prohibition flag is set, the addition of the reserved memory number or the reserved memory display may not be performed. In this case, when the reserved memory subtraction designation command is received thereafter, the reserved memory number is not subtracted or the reserved memory display is not performed, and the reserved memory number may be matched. By doing so, it is possible to reduce troublesome display in which the number of stored memories is turned on and off for a moment.

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag (step S663A). Further, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 0 (step S663B). If the value of the effect control process flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S664 as it is. If the value of the effect control process flag is not 0 (that is, if the transition is made to a process other than the variation pattern command reception waiting process during the effect control process described later), the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S663C). In other words, in this embodiment, when a customer waiting demo designation command is received when the process is transitioned to a process other than the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (for example, a production symbol changing process), the fluctuation pattern is compulsorily changed. By controlling to shift to the command reception waiting process, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation where the effect using the effect display device 9 becomes unnatural. When the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the presentation does not change greatly based on the received command (for example, the variable display is not started or switched to the jackpot presentation). . Therefore, when a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the process may be forcibly shifted so as not to end the presentation (specifically, steps S663B and S663C may not be performed). .

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S664). The customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed immediately based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but the customer waits for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. The display of the waiting demonstration screen may be started. The effect control CPU 101 clears the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step S665). That is, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received and the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are 0, and the variable display is not executed. Reset the number of pending storage to be stored. Even when the processing of step S665 is executed, the production control microcomputer 100 has an omission of addition or subtraction omission of the number of reserved memories and is in a state of recognizing an incorrect number of reserved memories. Can be reset to return to the normal state.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). Background screen) (step S667). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a high probability state flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state flag indicating that the gaming state is a high base state ( Step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / high base state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 according to the high probability / high base state. The screen is changed to a background screen (for example, a background screen with a red display color) (step S670). In addition, the production control CPU 101 sets a high probability state flag and a high base state flag (step S671).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / low base state background designation command (step S672), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the probability change state (for example, , An orange display color background screen) (step S673). The effect control CPU 101 sets a high probability state flag (step S674) and resets the high base state flag (step S675).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S678), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S679). The effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening open designation command in the special winning opening open designated command storage area formed in the RAM (step S680). The production control microcomputer 100 recognizes the number of rounds during the big hit game by confirming the special winning opening open designated command stored in the special winning opening open designated command storage area. Can do.

  If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big winning opening (step S681), the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big winning opening (step S682). Also, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening after opening designation command in the designated winning opening after opening special command opening storage area formed in the RAM (step S683).

  Next, if the received effect control command is one of the symbol designation commands (step S684), the effect control CPU 101 determines the winning determination result (whether it is a big hit or a small hit depending on the received symbol designation command). Or the determination result of the big hit type) is stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (step S685). When a symbol designation command is received, a symbol designation command reception flag indicating that a symbol designation command has been received may be set in the same manner as when other effect control commands are received.

  Next, if the received effect control command is one of the variation category commands (step S686), the effect control CPU 101 displays the winning determination result (the determination result of the variation pattern type) according to the received variation category command at the time of winning. The result is stored in the determination result storage buffer (step S687). In this embodiment, every time there is a start prize, the symbol designation command is always transmitted and the variable category command is transmitted. Therefore, if the variable category command is received in step S686, the prize is received. The time determination result storage buffer should have already stored a determination result at the time of winning according to the symbol designation command transmitted for the same start winning. Therefore, in step S687, the effect control CPU 101 receives a winning in accordance with the symbol designation command in a saving area in which the symbol designation command already stored is stored among the saving areas in the winning determination result storage buffer. The winning determination result corresponding to the variable category command is stored in association with the time determination result. Then, the production control CPU 101 sets a variation category command reception flag indicating that the variation category command has been received (step S688).

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of an area for storing a winning determination result (winning determination result storage buffer). As shown in FIG. 38, in this embodiment, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (8 in this example) of the total pending storage number is secured in the winning determination result storage buffer. In this embodiment, the EXT data of the received symbol designation command and the EXT data of the variation category command are stored in association with each save area of the winning determination result storage buffer. The winning determination result storage buffer is formed in a RAM included in the effect control microcomputer 100.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S689). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the continuous notice prohibition flag is set (step S800A). If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S800E as it is, and a continuous notice effect determining process for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode is executed. If the continuous notice prohibition flag is set, the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer (step S800B). Then, when the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer times out (step S800C), the effect control CPU 101 resets the continuous notice prohibition flag (step S800D) and executes a continuous notice effect determination process (step S800E). On the other hand, if it has not timed out, it controls so that a continuous notice effect determination process is not performed.

  By executing the processing of steps S800A to S800E, the continuous notice prohibition flag is reset when a predetermined period has elapsed since the change pattern command was received, and the prohibition state for determining the continuous notice effect is canceled. Also, the continuous notice effect determination process is executed only when it is not the prohibition period of the continuous notice determination (when the continuous notice prohibition flag is not set). In the production control microcomputer 100, for example, when the production control process is executed with a timer interruption every 33 ms, the variation pattern command is not measured without measuring the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer. If it is within the received interrupt (in this case, it is within 33 ms after receiving the variation pattern command and the pending storage number subtraction designation command has not yet been received), the presentation control process is once exited. The continuous notice effect may be determined in the effect control process executed at the next timer interruption after 33 ms. By doing so, the timer measurement process is not required, and the processing burden on the production control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control relating to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  40 and 41 are flowcharts showing the continuous notice effect determination process (step S800E). In the continuous notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a big hit game is being played (step S6000). Whether or not the game is a big hit game, for example, confirms whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value (specifically, 4 to 7) indicating the big hit display process to the big hit end effect process. It can be determined by doing. If the game is a big hit game, the process is terminated.

  If it is not during the big hit game, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variable category command reception flag is set (step S6001). If it is not set, the process is terminated. If set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the variable category command reception flag (step S6002), and executes processing for determining the continuous notice effect after step S6003. Therefore, in this embodiment, at the timing when a new start prize is generated and the variable category command is received, the continuous notice effect is determined based on the fact that the variable category command reception flag is set in step S6001. . However, if the timing at which a new start prize is generated and the variable category command is received is the prohibition period for determining the continuous notice effect, the process waits until the prohibition period ends (see steps S800A to S800E) and then step S6001. Then, based on the fact that the variable category command reception flag is set, the continuous notice effect is determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not any continuous notice execution flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is already being executed is set (step S6003). Note that the continuous advance notice execution flag is set in step S6020 described later. If any of the continuous notice execution flags is set, the processing is ended as it is.

  Note that, by executing the process of step S6003, in this embodiment, the determination process of the continuous notice effect is executed on condition that the continuous notice effect is not being executed. Since the continuous notice execution flag is already set after the start of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is executed in the already determined effect form without executing the determination process of the continuous notice effect again. The In addition, if a super-reach or a big-spot start-up prize occurs when a continuous notice effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of winning a “non-reach”, the super reach is switched from the continuous notice effect that is being executed. Or a jackpot effect (for example, a reach notice or a jackpot notice) may be executed.

  If no continuous notice execution flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the total value of the number of reserved memories is 5 or more (step S6004). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 calculates the total value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area. And determine whether the total value obtained is 5 or more. If the total value of the number of reserved memories is 5 or more, the process is terminated as it is. That is, in this embodiment, the determination process of the continuous notice effect is performed when the total number of reserved memories is 4 or less, and the continuous notice effect is not executed when five or more reserved memories are accumulated. Restricted. Note that the process of step S6004 may not be executed, and the execution of the continuous notice effect may not be limited depending on whether or not five or more reserved memories are accumulated.

  If the total value of the number of reserved memories is not 5 or more, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the number counter after the end of the continuous notice is 20 or less (step S6005). The counter for the number of times after the end of the continuous notice will be displayed after the end of the continuous notice effect when the continuous notice effect is executed for the variable display that is out of place ("out of reach" or "out of super reach"). It is a counter for counting the number of times, and is cleared in step S8315 of the effect symbol fluctuation stop process described later. If the value of the number counter after the end of the continuous notice is not 20 or less, the process proceeds to step S6007. If the value of the number counter after the end of the continuous notice is 20 or less, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the received symbol designation command (in this case, the symbol designation command should be received together with the variation category command) is symbol 1 designation. It is confirmed whether the command (command C4000 (H). Missing designation) is determined (step S6006). If it is not a symbol 1 designation command, the process proceeds to step S6007. If it is a symbol 1 designation command, the processing is terminated as it is without proceeding to the processing after step S6007.

  It should be noted that, by executing the processing of steps S6005 and S6006, it is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect with respect to the fluctuation display that becomes “out of” from being executed more frequently than necessary, and the player's expectation for the continuous notice effect. Is prevented from falling. In step S6006, it is not determined whether or not it is “out of” by checking the received symbol designation command, but whether or not it is “out of” by checking the received variation category command. You may make it determine. In this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the received variation category command is any one of the variation category 1 command to the variation category 12 command transmitted when it is determined at the time of winning when the variation pattern type for losing is determined. What should I do?

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S6007). If the high probability state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S6011. If the high probability state flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the after-hit variation counter is 5 to 62 (step S6008). The after-hit variation counter is a counter for counting the number of times of variation display after the end of the big hit game, and is cleared in step S887 of the big hit end effect process described later. If the value of the after-hit variation number counter is not 5 to 62, the process is terminated as it is without proceeding to the processes after step S6009. In step S6008, when the value of the after-hit variation count counter is confirmed, the current reserved memory number is also confirmed, and the current held memory number is added to the value of the after-hit variation count counter to 5 to 62. It is desirable to check whether or not According to such a configuration, even if three start prizes are generated continuously during the 60th variation display after the big hit, the continuous notice effect is executed for the 63rd variation display. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, for the first to fourth fluctuation displays executed after the end of the big hit, there is a possibility that a big hit announcement effect described later is being executed. Accordingly, even if a big hit notice effect, which will be described later, is executed during the big hit game, if the continuous notice effect is further executed for the variable display, the notice effect is displayed for any of the variable displays. It becomes difficult to recognize whether it was executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S6007 and S6008, the continuous notice effect is not executed for the first to fourth fluctuation displays executed after the big hit is ended, and any fluctuations on the contrary. This prevents a situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether the notice effect has been executed for the display. Note that the period for limiting the continuous notice effect is not limited to the period shown in this embodiment. For example, the continuous notice effect may not be executed until the eighth variable display is finished after the big hit. Good.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, in the 71st variation display (the final variation display when the probability variation state ends) executed after the big hit game is finished, the probability change is increased by increasing the ratio of the super reach. The player's sense of expectation for jackpot at the end of the state is increased (see FIGS. 10C and 10D). In such a case, if the continuous notice effect is executed before the super reach effect at the end of the probability change state appears, the player's interest will be attracted too much to the continuous notice effect, and the probability change state ends. Thus, the player's interest cannot be sufficiently attracted to the super reach effect executed by the 71st rotation. Therefore, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S6007 and S6008, the change display from the predetermined number of times before the end of the probability change state (the 63rd time in this embodiment) is changed to the last time (71 in this embodiment). The continuous notice effect is not executed until the change display of the second time, and the player's interest in the super reach effect that appears at the end of the probability change state is prevented from decreasing. It should be noted that the period for limiting the continuous notice effect is not limited to the period shown in this embodiment, and for example, the continuous notice effect may be configured not to be executed from the variable display four times before the probability change state ends. . Further, for example, even after the probability change state is ended, the continuous notice effect may not be executed until the predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times, 8 times) of the variable display is ended.

  If the value of the after-hit variation counter is 5 to 62, the CPU 101 for effect control receives the symbol 1 designation command (command C400 (H). Missing designation), symbol 2 designation command (command C401). (H) 15R probability variation jackpot designation), symbol 3 designation command (command C402 (H). 10R probability variation jackpot designation), or symbol 4 designation command (command C403 (H). 2R probability variation jackpot designation). (Step S6009). If it is any of the symbol 1 designation command to the symbol 4 designation command, the process proceeds to step S6011. If it is not any of the symbol 1 designation command to the symbol 4 designation command, the processing is terminated as it is without proceeding to the processing after step S6011.

  In this embodiment, the process of step S6009 is executed, so that the continuous notice effect is not executed for the variable display that becomes “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit”. In other words, in the case of “suddenly promising big hit” or “small win”, the big winning opening is opened, but the opening time is very short and almost no winning in the big winning opening can be expected. For this reason, by not performing the continuous notice effect for “Suddenly Probable Big Bonus” or “Small Bonus”, there is too much expectation for the hit where the prize winning to the big prize opening is hardly expected. This prevents a decrease in expectation for the continuous notice effect. In step S6009, it is not determined that “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” by checking the received symbol designation command, but “suddenly probable big hit” by checking the received variation category command. Alternatively, it may be determined that it is not “small hit”. In this case, for example, the received variation category command is a variation category command other than the variation category 27 command to the variation category 29 command that is transmitted when a winning determination is made when the variation pattern type for sudden probability big hit or small hit is determined. What is necessary is just to determine whether there exists.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts all winning pattern determination results of the variation pattern type stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (step S6011). Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses all the variation category commands stored as the winning determination results for the previous start winnings based on the extracted winning determination results as the variable category 1 command (command C600 (H)). Whether or not non-reach CA2-1 is specified) is confirmed (step S6012). If all of them are variable category 1 commands, the process proceeds to step S6013. If at least one variation category command other than the variation category 1 command is included, the processing is terminated as it is without proceeding to the processing after step S6013.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of combinations of variable category commands stored as winning determination results. In this embodiment, by executing the processing of step S6004, the execution of the continuous notice effect is permitted when the number of reserved memories is 4 or less. There are a maximum of three variation category commands. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 101 permits the determination of whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed if all of the variable category commands stored as the winning determination result are the command C600 (H). Then, if at least one command other than the command C600 (H) is included, it is determined that the command is not permitted. That is, in this embodiment, it is configured such that a continuous notice effect can be executed on the condition that all the change displays until the start of the change display to be notified are all “non-reach”. Such a configuration prevents a situation in which the continuity of the continuous notice effect is impaired due to the reach effect interrupting in the middle of the continuous notice effect.

  If all of the change category 1 commands are determined in step S6012, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S6013). If the high probability state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table A as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step S6014). If the high probability state flag is set, the production control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table B (step S6015).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the continuous notice effect for determining the effect form of the continuous notice effect (step S6018). Then, based on the received variation category command, the effect control CPU 101 matches the extracted value of the continuous notice effect mode determination random number with any determination value included in the continuous notice distribution table selected in steps S6014 and S6015. By determining whether or not to perform, the presence / absence of execution of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step S6019).

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a continuous notice distribution table showing distribution of continuous notice effects. If the current gaming state is the normal state, the effect control CPU 101 is indicated by the received variable category command using the continuous notice allocation table A in the normal state shown in FIG. 43A selected in step S6014. Based on the winning pattern determination result of the variation pattern type, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table A is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a change pattern type of non-reach CA 2-1 by a change category command (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). 43 (A), when the winning determination result indicating that “non-reach is not included” is indicated (specifically, when the command C600 (H) is received). As shown in FIG. 4, it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of either “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “mode shift”. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is the super CA2-7 variation pattern type (that is, “super-reaching is lost”) (specifically). Specifically, when the command C607 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 43 (A), “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “mode shift” or “change in reserved ball” It is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any of the effect modes. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation category command is a variation pattern type of Super CA3-3 (that is, “super reach jackpot”) (specifically). (In other words, when the command C612 (H) or the command C615 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 43 (A), “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition” , It is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of either “flash” or “reserved ball change”.

  The specific contents of the production modes of the respective continuous notice effects of “changes in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition”, “flash”, and “change in reserved ball” will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is a probable change state, the effect control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table B in the probable change state shown in FIG. 43B selected in step S6015 to receive the received variation category command. The effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the winning pattern determination result of the variation pattern type indicated by. In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table B is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a change pattern type of non-reach CA 2-1 by a change category command (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). 43 (B) in the case where a winning determination result indicating that “non-reach is not included” is shown (specifically, when the command C60A (H) is received). As shown in FIG. 4, it is determined that there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and the continuous notice is not executed. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is the super CA2-7 variation pattern type (that is, “super-reaching is lost”) (specifically). Specifically, when the command C609 (H) or the command C60B (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 43 (B), “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “change in retained ball” It is decided to execute the continuous notice effect of any of the effect modes of “. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation category command is a variation pattern type of Super CA3-3 (that is, “super reach jackpot”) (specifically). Specifically, in the case where the command C612 (H) or the command C615 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 43 (B), “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “flash” or It is determined that the continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “pending ball change” is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 43, in this embodiment, the variation category command is used to determine whether the variation pattern type is a “non-reach out”, “super reach out”, or “super reach big hit” as a result of determination at the time of winning the variation pattern type. When the result is shown, the continuous notice effect may be executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect of the “flash” effect mode is selected only when the determination result at the time of winning is “super reach big hit”. Is done. Therefore, when the continuous notice effect is executed in the “flash” effect mode, it is determined that at least the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is a big hit, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that, for example, a notice effect in which the flash lamp 110 is turned on when the big hit is determined as in the “flash” effect form is executed only as the notice effect during the big hit, for example, during the variable display. As the continuous notice effect to be executed, the “flash” effect mode may not be provided.

  If it is decided not to execute the continuous notice effect because there is no distribution in the continuous notice distribution tables A and B, control is performed not to execute the processes of steps S6020 and S6021 described later.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets a continuous notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect has been decided according to the effect mode decided in step S6019 (step S6020). In this case, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the variable category 1 command shown in FIG. The flag indicating that the continuous notice is being executed is set to indicate that the execution of the continuous notice effect has been decided based on the fact that the action has been performed. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the variation category 8 command, the variation category 10 command, and the variation category 12 command shown in FIG. When “super reach is lost”, a reach continuous notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the variable category 23 command or the variable category 26 command shown in FIG. Then, a big hit continuous notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set.

  In this embodiment, the continuous continuous advance notice execution flag, the reach continuous advance notice execution flag, and the big hit continuous advance notice execution flag are collectively referred to as a continuous advance notice execution flag.

  In step S6020, a continuous notice execution flag is set, and information that can specify the effect mode determined in step S6019 is set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the effect mode is “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, a flag indicating “mode shift”, a flag indicating “flash”, “holding ball” A flag indicating “change” may be set. Also, for example, when the continuous notice execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which effect mode is set in a predetermined bit of the continuous notice execution flag. By which, it may be possible to specify which production mode is determined.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets the current reserved memory number in the variation counter (step S6021). In this case, the production control CPU 101 obtains the total value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area. The obtained total value is set in the fluctuation counter. Note that the variation count counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays that are executed before the variation display for which the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed during the change display of the effect symbol and the change counter is set in step S6021, the change display during the execution is ended first. Sometimes, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 (see step S8312). As a result, the variation counter becomes 0 until the variation display immediately before the variation display subject to the determination at the time of winning, and the continuous notice effect is given. Ends. In step S6021, when the variation of the effect symbol is not being displayed, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 101 sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current reserved storage number in the variation counter. If configured in this way, the continuous notice effect can be ended until the variation display immediately before the variation display subject to the determination at the time of winning, and the variation display subjected to the determination at the time of winning is determined. It is possible to prevent both the continuous notice effect and the super reach effect from being performed in order to make the effect unduly unnatural.

  In the continuous notice allocation table shown in FIG. 43, the allocation is performed so that the selection ratio of each effect mode differs according to the reliability that is a big hit. For example, in order to increase the reliability of the big hit in the order of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “mode change”, “change in reserved ball” (for example, 20%, 40%, 60% in order) The production mode is allocated (in the case of “flash”, the big hit is fixed). In addition, the allocation method of each production mode that increases the reliability that becomes a big hit is not limited to such an order, for example, “reserved ball change”, “mode transition”, “fluctuation mode at the time of symbol change” in reverse order Allocation may be performed in such a way that the reliability of the big hit becomes higher in the order of “changes”. Furthermore, not only in the order of these arrangements, for example, even if the mode of “mode transition” is assigned in the order of arrangement in which the reliability that becomes the biggest jackpot is high, or conversely, the reliability that becomes the biggest jackpot is low. Well, various ways of allocating each production mode are possible.

  In this embodiment, the following prohibition process is performed for the continuous notice effect.

(1) If the game machine is a big hit when the power is turned on or the power is restored, the gaming state after the big hit game is indeterminate. Therefore, in such a case, control is performed so as to clear all the information on the current reserved memory number. In addition, it is configured not to clear the information on the number of reserved memory itself, but to clear information related to the reserved memory (for example, a winning determination result (determination result at the start winning prize) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer). May be.

(2) Also, when a start prize is received within an extremely short predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) after the start of the variable display, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect is not performed for the start prize (step in FIG. 33). S616A and steps S800A to S800E of FIG. 39).

(3) In addition, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect based on the non-reach losing and the determination at the time of winning is not continuously executed for a predetermined period. For example, when the continuous notice effect based on the determination at the time of winning the non-reach is ended, and then the next continuous notice effect based on the determination at the time of winning the non-reach is made until the variation display is finished 20 times or more. Control is performed so as not to execute (see steps S6005 and S6006 in FIG. 40).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. The display will not start.

  45 and 46 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first adds 1 to the after-hit variation frequency counter (step S8000) and adds 1 to the after-last notice end-time counter (step S8001). When the value of the after-hit variation counter is 72, the effect control CPU 101 may not add the after-hit variation counter.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8002). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol in accordance with the variation pattern command read in step S8002 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8003). That is, the display control result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the design symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means by executing the processing of step S8003 by the CPU 101 for effect control. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 does not reach the chance symbol pattern (for example, “223” or “445”) as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream. The combination of the big hit symbol of the object and the symbol in which one symbol is shifted) is also determined. In addition, when it is determined that the effect control CPU 101 executes the continuous effect of the effect mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change”, as a stop symbol of the effect symbol, a so-called chance eye symbol (for example, “ The combination of symbols that do not reach, such as 223 ”or“ 445 ”, but which is not one reach and one symbol deviates) is determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8003, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 47, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, or “2R probability variation big hit” (the received display result designation command designates display result 2). In the case of a command, a display result 3 designation command, or a display result 4 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same as the stop symbol. When the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 5 designation command or a display result 6 designation command), presentation control The CPU 101 determines a combination of effects such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a notice effect (a notice effect other than the continuous notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect or a mini character notice effect) in the effect display device 9 during the display of the effect symbol variation. A notice effect setting process for determining or setting the effect aspect of the notice effect is executed (step S8004).

  In the notice effect setting process in step S8004, the effect control CPU 101 specifically includes “design change notice”, “background change notice 1”, and “background change notice 2” shown in FIGS. , "Weather notice", "Dark notice", "Variation start notice", "Moving object notice", "Director blade notice", "Stop symbol notice", "Step up notice", "Conversation notice", " It is determined whether to execute “cut-in notice”, “mini-character notice”, “flash notice”, and “design turn-off notice”. Further, in this case, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not each notice effect is to be executed at a different determination ratio depending on whether or not it is a big hit.

  Further, in the notice effect setting process in step S8004, for example, the effect control CPU 101 is assumed to execute the notice effect (for example, based on the decision to execute the notice effect based on the variation pattern command). 48 to 52, which will be described later, “design change notice”, “background change notice 1”, “background change notice 2”, “weather notice”, “dark notice”, “change notice” ”,“ Moving object notice ”,“ Director blade notice ”,“ Stop symbol notice ”,“ Step up notice ”,“ Conversation notice ”,“ Cut-in notice ”,“ Mini character notice ”,“ Flash notice ”and“ You may make it perform the process which selects which notification effect of the symbol light-off notice is performed. Also in this case, the effect control CPU 101 may select each notice effect at a different selection ratio depending on whether or not it is a big hit and the contents of the variation pattern.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S8005). If the high-probability state flag is not set (that is, if the gaming state is a normal state (low-probability state)), the production control CPU 101 follows the prohibition rule at the time of a low probability, and continues to notify in FIG. 40 and FIG. If it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect in the effect determining process, the continuous notice effect determined to be executed and each notice effect set in the notice effect setting process in step S8004 are executed in combination. It is determined whether or not it is possible (step S8006). Then, the CPU 101 for effect control performs a process of restricting the notice effect that is determined not to be executed in combination according to the determination result of step S8006 (step S8007). For example, if the CPU 101 for effect control has set a notice execution flag for executing the notice effect in the notice effect setting process in step S8004, and determines that the notice effect cannot be executed in combination in step S8006, The notice execution flag set in step S8004 is reset, and control is performed so that the notice effect is not executed. Then, control goes to a step S8020.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing a prohibition rule for a notice effect at a low probability. As shown in FIG. 48, in this embodiment, as described above, as the continuous notice effect, “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “change in reserved ball”, “flash”, or “mode transition” It is possible to execute a notice effect of various types of effects. Further, as the notice effects other than the continuous notice effect, the “design change notice”, “background change notice 1”, “background change notice 2”, “weather notice”, “dark notice”, “change start” `` Time notice '', `` Moving object notice '', `` Director feather notice '', `` Stop symbol notice '', `` Step-up notice '', `` Conversation notice '', `` Cut-in notice '', `` Mini character notice '', `` Flash notice '' Alternatively, it is possible to execute either (a plurality of symbol turn-off notices).

  The “symbol change notice” is a notice effect that executes the change display of the effect symbol in a different manner of change than usual. For example, in the case of the symbol change notice, in the normal change display, the stop symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left, right, and middle, while the stop order of stop symbols is changed to the right, left, and middle order. To produce a stop display. Further, in the “symbol change notice”, for example, an effect such as a so-called slip change display or pseudo-ream may be performed.

  “Background change notice 1” and “Background change notice 2” are notice effects that change the mode (picture, color, etc.) of the background screen during variable display. In this embodiment, “background change notice 2” is changed to a background screen that has a higher expectation than “background change notice 1” (for example, changed to a red background screen). For example), and that the expectation for the big hit is high.

  The “weather notice” is a notice effect that changes the weather condition or the like shown on the background screen during variable display. For example, the effect is to display “rainbow” or the like on the background screen during the variable display. “Dark notice” is, for example, a notice effect in which flash display or the like is performed after the screen is once darkened during variable display.

  “Variation start notice” is a notice effect executed at the start of fluctuation display. For example, in the “change start notice”, a predetermined sound effect (sound of an animal or the like, a sound of applause) is generated at the start of change, or a lamp or LED is turned on.

  The “movable object notice” is, for example, a notice effect that moves the movable member 78. The “production blade accessory production” is, for example, a notice production that moves the production blade actors 79a and 79B. The “stop symbol notice” is a notice effect that displays in advance one of the left, middle, and right stop symbols during the variation display of the effect symbol.

  `` Step-up notice '' is a notice effect that switches a plurality of characters one after another at a predetermined timing as a notice effect that is performed from the start of the variation display of the production symbol to the time when the variation display result is derived and displayed. By performing more steps, the expectation for a big hit is increased.

  The “conversation notice” is a notice effect in which a character string is displayed in a form such as a conversation between characters by causing a plurality of characters to appear during variable display. The “cut-in notice” is a notice effect that produces an effect such as inserting another scene in a series of scenes during the variable display. “Mini character notice” is a notice effect that causes a mini character to appear on a part of the display screen during variable display. The “flash notice” is a notice effect that produces an effect such as flashing the flash lamp 110 for a short time during the variable display. The “design turn-off notice” is a notice effect in which a specific design (for example, the left design, the left design and the right design) is turned off and made invisible after the display is made invisible.

  The effect control CPU 101 limits the notice effect according to the prohibition rules shown in FIG. Specifically, in FIG. 48, it is determined that the combination of the notice effects that are “◯” can be executed, and the combination of the notice effects that is “x” cannot be executed. Is determined. However, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect of the effect mode “change of the variation pattern at the time of symbol change” and the notice effect of the “background change notice 1” are part of the change modes of the plurality of background screens. Is determined to be executable in combination. 48. By restricting the notice effect according to the prohibition rule shown in FIG. 48, it is possible to prevent the notice effect from becoming difficult to see because a plurality of notice effects are displayed on the screen at the same timing.

  If the high probability state flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the after-hit variation counter is 1 to 4 (step S8008). If the value of the after-hit variation counter is not 1 to 4, the process proceeds to step S8012. If the value of the after-hit variation counter is 1 to 4, the effect control CPU 101 executes all the notice effects according to the prohibition rule of the notice effect for the first to fourth changes after the big hit shown in FIG. (Step S8009).

  In this embodiment, for the first to fourth fluctuation displays executed after the end of the big hit, there is a possibility that a big hit announcement effect described later is being executed. Therefore, even if the jackpot announcement effect described later is executed during the jackpot game, if the announcement effect is further executed for the variable display, the notice effect is executed for any variable display. It becomes difficult to recognize whether it was done. Therefore, in this embodiment, by executing the processes of steps S8008 and S8009, the notice effect is not executed for the first to fourth fluctuation displays executed after the big hit, and any of the fluctuation displays is displayed. This prevents the situation where it is difficult to recognize whether the notice effect has been executed. The period for limiting the notice effect is not limited to the period shown in this embodiment. For example, the notice effect may not be executed until the eighth variable display is finished after the big hit.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the display result of the variation display executed this time is a big hit other than “suddenly probable big hit” (that is, “15R probable big hit”, “10R probable big hit” or “2R probable big hit”). Is confirmed (step S8011). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 may confirm whether the received display result designation command is any one of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 4 designation command. If it is a big hit other than “suddenly promising big hit”, the CPU 101 for effect control sets a big hit common notice execution flag indicating that the common hit notice common effect during the big hit is common with the big hit notice effect (step S8012). . Then, control goes to a step S8020.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, during the big hit game, if there is a big hit in the stored memory that has already been accumulated, when the round 10 is executed, the variable display executed after the big hit game The notice effect during the big hit is executed to notify that the big hit is confirmed. Here, when it is determined as Y in step S8011, when the round 10 of the jackpot game executed last time is executed, the reserved memory that becomes a big hit has not yet accumulated and the notice effect during the big hit has not been executed. , It shows that a big hit has occurred among the starting prizes after round 11. In this case, by executing Steps S8012 and Steps S8109 and S8110 of effects during changing the design described later, a notice effect in a common manner with the notice effect during the big hit is displayed during the display of the big hit change occurring after the round 11, Informs that it has been confirmed that it will be a big hit.

  In this embodiment, there are eight effect patterns as the jackpot announcement effect (see FIG. 65). In step S8012, the effect control CPU 101 selects one of the same effect patterns as the jackpot announcement effect. It may be decided to execute the common notice effect during the big hit. In addition, for example, when executing the big hit common notice effect, it may be determined to perform any specific effect pattern (for example, pattern 1 shown in FIG. 65).

  If the value of the after-hit variation count counter is not 1 to 4, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the after-hit variation count counter is 5 to 62 (step S8013). If the value of the after-hit variation counter is 5 to 62, the production control CPU 101 follows the prohibition rule (prohibition rule 1 at the time of high probability) shown in FIG. When it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice effect determination process of FIGS. 40 and 41, the continuous notice effect that is determined to be executed, and the notice effect setting process in step S8004 are set. It is determined whether or not each notice effect can be executed in combination (step S8014). Then, in accordance with the determination result of step S8014, the effect control CPU 101 performs a process of limiting the notice effect that is determined to be impossible to be executed in combination (step S8015). Then, control goes to a step S8020.

  If the value of the after-hit variation count counter is not 5 to 62, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the after-hit variation count counter is 63 to 70 (step S8016). If the value of the after-hit variation counter is 63 to 70, the production control CPU 101 follows the prohibition rule (prohibition rule 2 at the time of high probability) shown in FIG. When it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice effect determination process of FIGS. 40 and 41, the continuous notice effect that is determined to be executed, and the notice effect setting process in step S8004 are set. It is determined whether or not each notice effect can be executed in combination (step S8017). Then, in accordance with the determination result of step S8017, the effect control CPU 101 performs a process of restricting the notice effect that is determined not to be executed in combination (step S8018). Then, control goes to a step S8020.

  If the value of the counter change number after big hit is not 63 to 70, the 71st change display is executed after the big hit is completed (ie, high probability / low base state). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 restricts not to execute all the notice effects according to the prohibition rule of the notice effect for the high probability / low base time shown in FIG. 52 (step S8019).

  Next, when executing the variation pattern and the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect (step S8020). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8021).

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation aspect constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 53 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  The effect control CPU 101 is determined to execute the continuous notice effect, the common hit notice effect during the big hit, and other notice effects, and the continuous notice executing flag, the big hit common notice execution flag, and other notice execution flags are set. If yes, in step S8020, the process table corresponding to the continuous notice effect, the common notice effect during the big hit, and other notice effects is selected.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect component, as the effect component). Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27 as a production component is executed (step S8022). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Further, for example, when executing a pseudo-ream effect or a notice effect, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86, or the effect blades 79a and 79b are moved by driving the motor 87. Is done.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8023). Next, the effect control CPU 101 deletes the first winning determination result stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (winning determination result (design designation command and variation category command) corresponding to the variation display executed this time). Then, the contents of the winning determination result storage buffer are shifted (step S8024).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8025).

  In this embodiment, first, the notice effect setting process of step S8004 is executed, and the process of steps S8005 to S8019 is executed to restrict the notice effect that cannot be combined later. However, the method of limiting the notice effect that cannot be combined is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the notice effect setting process of step S8004 is executed, the notice effects that can be combined are determined in advance using the prohibition tables shown in FIGS. 48 to 52, and only the notice effects that are determined to be combinable are executed. The presence or absence may be determined.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105). Further, for example, when executing a pseudo-ream effect or a notice effect, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86, or the effect blades 79a and 79b are moved by driving the motor 87. Is done.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether any of the continuous notice execution flags is set (step S8106). If any of the continuous notice execution flags is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines that “change in variation pattern during symbol change”, “mode” according to the effect form determined in the continuous notice effect form determination process in step S6019. Control is performed to execute a continuous notice effect in any one of the effect modes of “transition”, “flash”, or “change in reserved ball” (step S8108). In addition, when it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect, specifically, the continuous notice effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the change of the effect symbol. The Further, when executing the continuous notice effect, it is determined as Y in step S8106 at the timing of executing the continuous notice effect, and the process of step S8108 is executed. Then, it is repeatedly determined as Y in step S8106 until the continuous notice effect is finished, and the process of step S8108 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big hit common notice execution flag is set (step S8109). If the big hit common notice execution flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control performs control for executing the big hit common notice effect in a manner common to the big hit notice effect described later (step S8110). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 performs the production such as lighting the flash lamp 110 in such a manner that the flash lamp 110 is flashed for a short time or the appearance of a character such as a butterfly. The notice effect of the effect mode is executed. In addition, when it is decided to execute the common notice effect during the big hit, specifically, the common notice during the big hit in the corresponding production mode at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the change of the production symbol. Production is performed. When the big hit common notice effect is executed, it is determined as Y in step S8109 at the timing of executing the big hit common notice effect, and the process of step S8110 is executed.

  Then, if the change time timer has timed out (step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803) (step S8112).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (out of symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302). When neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8311.

  When the big win symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not is set (step S8305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1, the movable member control data 1), the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, the speaker 27 as the production component, and the movable member 78 as the production component and production. Control of the blades 79a and 79b) is executed (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  If it is determined that neither big win nor small win is made (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether any of the continuous notice execution flags is set (step S8303). S8311). If it is set, the CPU 101 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (step S8312). Further, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the variation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S8313). If the value of the variation counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the set continuous notice execution flag is a big hit continuous notice execution flag (step S8314). If the set continuous advance notice execution flag is not the big hit continuous advance notice execution flag (that is, if it is a discontinuous advance advance notice execution flag or a reach continuous advance notice execution flag), the production control CPU 101 performs after the end of the continuous notice. The number counter is cleared (step S8315).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set continuous notice execution flag (step S8316). By executing such processing, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect is executed until the display of the change one time before the change that is the subject of the determination at the time of winning is started. The continuous advance notice execution flag is reset at the start of the subject change display (the continuous notice effect is not performed during the change display subject to the winning determination). It should be noted that the continuous notice effect may be executed even during the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8317). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation designation command reception flag, a second symbol variation designation command reception flag, and a display result designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 44, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, and therefore, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process or the like at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset at the end of the big hit or at the end of the big hit effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8318).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open designation command has been received is set (step S1901). When the big prize opening opening flag is not set (N in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1902), and the effect device (effect display) Control of the device 9, the speaker 27, the LEDs 25, 28, etc.) is executed (step S1903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and performs an effect of displaying a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S1906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S1901), the production control CPU 101 resets the big prize opening open flag (step S1907) and selects process data corresponding to the production during the round. (Step S1908). Then, the process timer is started (step S1909), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S1910).

  It should be noted that, in addition to the process for displaying a big hit, a process for displaying a small hit is provided. In the case of a small hit, for example, a predetermined period (a big prize opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds) Sufficient time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be produced in the same manner as in the case of sudden big hit.

  In addition, in the case of a small hit or sudden probability variation big hit, the production control CPU 101 does not execute the production based on reception of the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command. Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, an effect that suggests a small hit or suddenly probable big hit may be executed for a predetermined period. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control switches the process data for performing an effect that suggests a small hit or a sudden probability change big hit every process time, and performs the effect according to the switched process data.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing mid-round processing (step S805) in the effect control process. In the round process, the effect control CPU 101 first receives a big hit end designation command reception flag (specifically, a big hit end designation command reception flag or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command reception flag (see steps S642 and S646). )) Is set or not (step S2901). When the big hit end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step S2901), the effect control CPU 101 sets the big prize opening after flag indicating that the designation command after opening the big prize opening has been received. Confirm whether or not (step S2902).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is not set (N in step S2902), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S2903), and the effect device (effect display) Control of the device 9, the speaker 27, the LEDs 25, 28, etc.) is executed (step S2904). For example, the effect display device 9 displays the jackpot display symbol, and the effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like is executed. In the case where the effect during round 10 is to be executed and it is determined to execute the notice effect during the big hit, for example, the flash lamp 110 is lit and displayed in such a manner as to flash for a short time. A notice effect during a big hit is executed by performing an effect such as making a character such as a butterfly appear. Further, when the big hit announcement effect is executed, for example, a predetermined definite sound is also output from the speaker 27 for a short time. Note that the flash lamp 110 may be lit continuously until the big hit game ends in the big hit notice effect. For example, instead of the flash lamp 110, various decorative lamps other than the flash lamp 110 may be continuously turned on.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S2905), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S2906). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S2907).

  If the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S2902 (Y in step S2902), the effect control CPU 101 resets the flag after opening the big prize opening (step S2908), and the designation command after opening the big prize opening. Process data corresponding to the interval effect (the effect of performing the interval display according to the number of rounds) is selected based on the content of (step S2909). Then, the process timer is started (step S2910), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806) (step S2911).

  When the big hit end designation command reception flag is set in step S2901 (Y in step S2901), the effect control CPU 101 resets the big hit end designation command reception flag (step S2912). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data corresponding to the ending effect (step S2913). In addition, the production control CPU 101 starts the production period measurement timer and also starts the process timer (step S2914). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S807) (step S2915).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the round post-processing (step S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening open designation command has been received is set (step S3901). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S3901), the CPU 101 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S3902), and the effect device (effect display) Control of the apparatus 9, the speaker 27, the LEDs 25, 28, etc.) is executed (step S3903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays the jackpot display symbol and the effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S3904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S3905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S3906).

  When the big winning opening opening flag is set (Y in step S3901), the effect control CPU 101 executes a big hit notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to give a big hit notice effect and an effect pattern ( Step S3907). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot notice effect execution flags is set (step S3908). The jackpot announcement effect execution flag is a flag indicating that it has been decided to execute the jackpot announcement effect, and in the jackpot announcement effect determination process to be described later, a big prize opening opening designation command for designating round 10 is designated. Is set in the process of step S6509 based on the fact that it is determined to execute the pre-announcement effect during the big hit. Then, based on the fact that the big hit announcement effect execution flag is set, in step S3909 described later, a process table for the round announcement including the big hit announcement effect is selected, and the big hit announcement effect is executed in round 10. Is done. If any of the jackpot notice effect execution flags is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data for the effect during the round according to the effect mode of the notice effect during the big hit (step S3909). Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set big hit announcement effect execution flag (step S3910). Then, control goes to a step S3913.

  If none of the jackpot notice effect execution flags are set, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data corresponding to the effect during the round based on the number of rounds indicated by the command for opening the big prize opening (step S3912). . Next, the production control CPU 101 resets the special winning opening open flag (step S3913) and starts a process timer (step S3914). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S3915).

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the big hit announcement effect determination process (step S3907). In the big hit notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the round to be started is round 10 (step S6500). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 may confirm whether or not the round 10 is designated in the received special prize opening opening command. If it is not round 10, the process is terminated as it is.

  If it is round 10, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the total value of the number of reserved memories is 5 or more (step S6501). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 calculates the total value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area. And determine whether the total value obtained is 5 or more. If the total value of the number of reserved memories is 5 or more, the process is terminated as it is. That is, in this embodiment, when the total number of reserved memories is 4 or less, the determination process of the big hit notice effect is performed, and when the reserved memory is accumulated five or more, the big hit notice effect is not executed. Is so limited. Note that the processing of step S6501 may not be executed, and execution of the big hit notice effect may not be restricted depending on whether or not five or more reserved memories are accumulated.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit or the small win is stored in the winning determination result storage buffer, and the winning determination result of the jackpot type (specifically, the symbol designation command stored as the winning determination result) ) Are extracted (step S6502). Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to permit the lottery of the jackpot notice effect based on each extracted winning determination result (step S6503).

  FIG. 60 to FIG. 64 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of permission determination for lottery of the big hit announcement effect executed in step S6503. In the process of step S6503, the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether or not to permit the lottery of the notice effect during the big hit in accordance with the permission determination rules of FIGS. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 64, the effect control CPU 101 performs a symbol designating command (specifically, a big hit in the winning determination result stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (specifically, It is determined whether or not the commands C401 (H) to C403 (H)) are included. If at least one symbol designating command indicating the big hit is included, it is determined that the lottery of the announcement effect during the big hit is permitted. However, if a symbol designation command (specifically, command C404 (H)) indicating suddenly promising big hit is included even if it is a big hit, the CPU 101 for effect control permits lottery of the notice effect during the big hit. It is determined not to. That is, even if it is a big hit, the command C404 (H) for designating a sudden probability change big hit that hardly expects a game ball to win the big winning opening is excluded, and it is a big hit that can be expected to win a gaming ball at the big winning opening. Only when commands C401 (H) to C403 (H) for specifying 15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, and 2R probability variation big hit are included, it is determined that the lottery for the announcement effect during the big hit is permitted.

  In this embodiment, if a symbol designating command indicating suddenly probable big hit is included even if it is a big win, the notice effect during the big hit is not executed, so that “15R probable big hit with high game value” is achieved. ”,“ 10R probable big hit ”,“ 2R probable big hit ”Even though the announcement effect during the big hit is executed for the display of fluctuation of the identification information,“ sudden probable big hit ”with low game value until the big hit Is prevented from extending the time until it becomes “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, and the interest in games is prevented from deteriorating.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 64, when “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” are displayed, the “sudden probability variation big hit” is displayed. However, it is restricted so that the notice effect is not executed during the big hit. Such a configuration complicates the module configuration of the program when the program is configured to limit the notice effect during the big hit when “suddenly probable big hit” is included as shown in this embodiment. To prevent that. In addition, when “suddenly promising big hit” is displayed after the fluctuation display of “15R probable big hit”, “10R probable big hit”, or “2R probable big hit”, “15R probable big hit”, “10R Since there is no inconvenience that the time until the “probable big hit” or “2R probable big hit” is extended, the notice effect during the big hit may be executed. If comprised in that way, it can prevent that the execution frequency of notice effect during a big hit falls and the interest with respect to a game falls.

  If it is determined that the lottery for the big hit announcement effect is permitted (Y in step S6504), the production control CPU 101 determines the number of big hits in the winning determination result (command C401) based on the extracted winning determination results. (The number of (H) to C403 (H)) is counted (step S6505). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects the big hit notice mode distribution table for determining the presence or absence of the big hit notice effect and the effect pattern of the big hit notice effect according to the counted number of big hits (step S6506). . Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the jackpot announcement effect mode determination random number (step S6507), and the jackpot announcement mode distribution table selected in step S6506 and the extracted jackpot announcement effect mode determination random number. Based on this, the presence / absence of execution of the big hit notice effect and the big hit notice mode (effect pattern of the big hit notice effect) are determined (step S6508).

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the effect pattern of the notice effect during the big hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, a big hit announcement effect is executed in accordance with any one of the patterns 1 to 8. For example, when pattern 1 is used, when a command for opening a special prize opening that specifies round 10 is received, an effect of lighting the flash lamp 110 in white and purple is executed. For example, when pattern 2 is used, when a special winning opening opening designation command designating round 10 is received, an effect of lighting the flash lamp 110 in blue is executed. For example, when pattern 3 is used, when a special winning opening opening designation command for designating round 10 is received, an effect of lighting the flash lamp 110 in yellow is executed. For example, in the case of using the pattern 4, when the designation command for opening the big prize opening designating the round 10 is received, an effect of turning on the flash lamp 110 in a rainbow color is executed. For example, in the case of using pattern 5, the effect of lighting the flash lamp 110 in white and purple is executed after 2 seconds have elapsed after receiving the command for opening a special prize opening specifying round 10. For example, in the case of using pattern 6, an effect of turning on the flash lamp 110 in blue is executed after 2 seconds have elapsed after receiving the command for opening a special prize opening specifying round 10. Further, for example, when using the pattern 7, an effect of turning on the flash lamp 110 in yellow is executed after 2 seconds have elapsed after receiving the command for opening a special prize opening specifying the round 10. For example, when pattern 8 is used, an effect of turning on the flash lamp 110 in a rainbow color after two seconds have elapsed after receiving the command for opening a special prize opening specifying the round 10 is executed.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the big hit announcement mode distribution table. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, when there are two or more determined at the time of a big win and winning, it is higher than the case where the number determined at the big win and winning is only one. The announcement effect is executed during the big hit at a rate. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, when the number determined at the time of the big win and the winning is one, the patterns 1 and 5 are selected at a high rate as the effect pattern of the announcement effect during the big hit. When the number of jackpots determined at the time of winning is two, patterns 2 and 6 are selected at a high rate as the effect pattern of the notice effect during the jackpot, and the number of jackpots determined at the time of winning is 3 If the number is determined to be a big hit and the number determined at the time of winning is four, the effect of the notice effect during the big hit is selected. Patterns 4 and 8 are selected as a pattern at a high rate.

  If it is determined not to execute the big hit notification effect because there is no distribution in the big hit notification mode distribution table, control is performed so as not to execute the process of step S6509 described later.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a big hit notice effect execution flag indicating that the execution of the big hit notice effect has been decided according to the big hit notice mode determined in step S6508 (step S6509). In step S6509, the big hit announcement effect execution flag is set, and information that can specify the big hit notice mode determined in step S6508 is also set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating which of the production patterns is pattern 1 to pattern 8 may be set. Also, for example, when the big hit notice effect execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which effect pattern is set in a predetermined bit of the big hit notice effect execution flag By doing so, it may be possible to specify which production pattern is determined.

  Then, based on the fact that the big hit announcement effect execution flag is set in step S6509, in the round post-processing step S3909, the process data for the round announcement according to the effect mode of the big hit notice effect is selected, and round 10 The effect during the round is executed (see step S2904), whereby the notice effect during the big hit is executed. For example, the CPU 101 for effect control performs the notice effect during the big hit by performing effects such as lighting the flash lamp 110 in such a manner that the flash lamp 110 is flashed for a short time or causing a character such as a butterfly to appear.

  In this embodiment, the case where the notice effect during the big hit is executed at the timing when the effect during the round 10 of the big hit game is executed is shown, but if the big hit game is being played, the big hit is given at another timing. A notice effect may be executed. For example, it may be executed at the timing when a command for opening a special prize opening that specifies another round such as round 7 or round 15 is received and an effect during the round is executed, or when an interval effect between rounds is executed. May be. Also, for example, the jackpot announcement effect may be executed at the timing when the jackpot start designation command is received and the fanfare effect is executed, or the jackpot announcement effect at the timing when the jackpot end designation command is received and the ending effect is executed. May be executed. In addition, for example, at the timing when the big hit start designation command is received, first, whether or not to execute the big hit announcement effect and the production mode are determined, and the big prize opening opening command for designating a predetermined round (for example, round 10) is determined. May be executed at the timing of receiving the jackpot according to the content determined at the start of the jackpot. In addition, at the timing of receiving the jackpot start designation command, first, the presence / absence and execution mode of the jackpot notice effect are determined, the execution timing is also determined, and the jackpot notice effect is executed at the determined execution timing. You may do it.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the big hit end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts one effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step S880). And it is confirmed whether the production period measurement timer after subtraction has timed out (step S881).

  If the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S881), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S882). Further, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1), and the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect part). Then, various lamps as the production parts, the speaker 27 as the production parts, and the movable member 78 and the production blades 79a and 79b as the production parts are controlled (step S883). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character or the like is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 ends the process when the process timer has not timed out (N in step S884). When the process timer times out (Y in step S884), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S885). Further, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer (step S886).

  If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S881), the production control CPU 101 clears the after-hit variation count counter (step S887) and resets a predetermined flag (step S888). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation designation command reception flag, a second symbol variation designation command reception flag, and a display result designation command reception flag. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S889).

  Next, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous notice effect will be described. 68 to 71 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of the effect of the continuous notice effect. Among these, FIG. 68 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”. FIG. 69 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode change”. FIG. 70 shows a specific example of the effect of the “flash” continuous notice effect. FIG. 71 shows a specific example of the effect of the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change”. 68 to 71, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3). Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 68 to 71, a determination at the time of winning is made with respect to the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, and the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. Although the case where the continuous notice effect is performed is shown, the determination at the time of winning is made with respect to the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, and the change of the effect symbol is synchronized with the change display of the second special symbol. Even when the continuous notice effect is performed while the display is being executed, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner.

  First, with reference to FIG. 68, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous notice effect “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 68, first, as shown in FIG. 68 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 68 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S216A). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S217A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 68 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is increased by 1 (see step S653). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command, and “the change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol change” as the effect form of the continuous notice effect. "Is determined (see step S800E). Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 68 (1) and 68 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 68 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (5), the variation time ends and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 68 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 68 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 68 (6), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (6), a predetermined effect is performed such as displaying an aspect in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change (see step S8108). Note that the predetermined effect performed at the start of the change of the effect symbol is not limited to the one shown in FIG. The movable object having the shape described above may be moved at the start of fluctuation, or a predetermined lamp may be turned on or blinked at the start of fluctuation. Further, for example, the way of starting the change of the design at the start of the change of the effect design may be made different from normal. For example, in the case where the left, middle, and right production symbols usually start to change at the same time, the left, middle, and right production symbols start to change at different timings, or once start to change upward (or downward) As shown in FIG. 5, the fluctuation may be started downward (or upward). Conversely, in FIG. 68 (5), the way of stopping the variation of the symbols may be different from the normal one. For example, the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, but the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, middle, and right.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (7), the effect symbol variation display is executed (see step S8105), and as shown in FIG. 68 (8), the variation time ends and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed ( Step S8302). Also in the cases shown in FIGS. 68 (6) and (7), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 68 (8).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 68 (9), in the first reserved memory display section 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (9), a predetermined effect is performed such as displaying an aspect in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change (see step S8108). Also in the case shown in FIG. 68 (9), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Thereafter, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect of the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 68, during the execution of the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, and the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed. When the stop display is performed, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is also stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is continuously displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol until the next variable display is started. Therefore, in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, the variation of the fourth symbol is always displayed, or the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped. This also applies to the case where the continuous notice effect is executed in the effect modes shown in FIGS. Further, when the game state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, the display in the fourth symbol display area may not be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode shift” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 69, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 69 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S216A). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S217A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 69 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is increased by 1 (see step S653). In this case, the microcomputer 100 for effect control determines that the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined and “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command. (See step S800E). Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 69 (1) and 69 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 69 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 69 (4), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100, during the effect symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. An effect in which another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, a sea background screen and a mountain background) An effect of a mode in which the screen is in contact with the screen is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (5), the variation time is finished, and an effect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 69 ( In 5), the dissociation symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 69 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 69 (5), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 69 (6), in the first reserved memory display section 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 69 (6). In the display screen, another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen, and the two background screens collide with each other (for example, the sea background screen and the mountain background screen meet each other) Such an effect) is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (7), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 69 ( In step 7), the off symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 69 (6), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 69 (7).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 69 (8), in the first reserved memory display section 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode transition” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 69 (8). In the display screen, another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen, and the two background screens collide with each other (for example, the sea background screen and the mountain background screen meet each other) Such an effect) is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (9), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 69 ( In 9), the off symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 69 (8), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 69 (9).

  In the above-described manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect of the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed. In this case, when the display result of the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is “big hit”, for example, after performing the effect in such a manner that the two background screens overlap each other, Alternatively, the background screen that has interrupted from the side wins and the background screen is switched, and the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In addition, the mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode transition” is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, instead of being pushed back to the original background screen at the end of the change for each change display, You may make it perform the effect of the aspect from which a background screen changes for every display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a specific example of the effect mode of the “flash” continuous notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 70, first, as shown in FIG. 70 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 70 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S216A). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S217A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 70 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect and determines “flash” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command. (See step S800E). Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 70 (1) and 70 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 70 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “flash” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect during the effect symbol change display as shown in FIG. An effect of lighting and displaying the flash lamp 110 disposed on the upper left side of the display device 9 in such a manner as to flash for a short time is executed (see step S8108). Note that the flash lamp 110 may be turned on and an effect such as the appearance of a character such as a butterfly may be performed. Then, the fluctuation time is ended, and the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 70 (5)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 70 (5) (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 70 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 70 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 70 (6), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “flash” has been determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 is shown in FIG. An effect of lighting and displaying the flash lamp 110 arranged in the direction in such a manner as to flash for a short time is executed (see step S8108). Note that the flash lamp 110 may be turned on and an effect such as the appearance of a character such as a butterfly may be performed. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 70 (7), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 70 (7)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 70 (6), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 70 (7).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 70 (8), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “flash” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect display device 9 at the upper left during the effect symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 70 (8). The effect of lighting and displaying in such a manner that the flash lamp 110 arranged in the direction is flashed for a short time is executed (see step S8108). Note that the flash lamp 110 may be turned on and an effect such as the appearance of a character such as a butterfly may be performed. Also in the case shown in FIG. 70 (8), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  In the above-described manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started.

  Note that the notice effect of the “flash” effect mode shown in FIG. 70 may be executed, for example, only when it is determined that a big hit will be made. It may be executed only once during a specific variation display. Moreover, it is not selected as the effect mode of the normal continuous notice effect, and may be executed only during the first to fourth variation display during the big hit game or after the big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 71, first, as shown in FIG. 71 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 71 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S216A). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S218A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 71 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is increased by 1 (see step S653). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command and also determines “change of the holding ball” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. (See step S800E). Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 71 (1) and 71 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 71 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 71 (4), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 71 (4), the production control microcomputer 100 displays the variation of the production symbol based on the fact that “holding ball change” is determined as the production mode of the continuous notice production. Then, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is changed to a display of an aspect different from normal (star display in the example shown in FIG. 71 (4)). Step S8108). In the example shown in FIG. 71, after the determination at the time of winning, the continuous notice effect of the “holding ball change” effect mode is started from the time of the next start of variation display. When the determination result designation command is received (at the timing when the start winning is generated), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is changed to a display different from the normal display and the continuous notice effect is performed. You may make it start. Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 71 (5), the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 71 (5)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In addition, as shown in FIG. 71 (5), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a different form (FIG. 71). 71 (5) is a star display). Also in the case shown in FIG. 71 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 71 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 71 (6), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that the “pending ball change” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the first hold storage during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 71 (6). In the display unit 18c, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is continuously displayed in a different form (star display in the example shown in FIG. 71 (6)) (see step S8108). Then, after the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 71 (7), the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 71 (7)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIG. 71 (7), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c continues to be displayed in a mode different from normal (FIG. 71). 71 (7), star display). Also in the case shown in FIG. 71 (6), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 71 (7), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 71 (8), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “holding ball change” has been determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the first reservation storage during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 71 (8). In the display unit 18c, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is continuously displayed in a different form (star display in the example shown in FIG. 71 (8)) (see step S8108). Then, after the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 71 (9), the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 71 (9)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In addition, as shown in FIG. 71 (9), the display of the first reserved memory number which is the object of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a different form (FIG. 71 (9) is a star display). Also in the case shown in FIG. 71 (8), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 71 (9), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  In the above-described manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started.

  Further, in this embodiment, a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations as the variation pattern (non-reach PA1-4, normal PB2-1, normal PB2-2, super PA3-1, super PA3-2, normal PB2 shown in FIG. 6). -3, normal PB2-4, super PA3-3, super PA3-4, and special PG1-3) are determined, a pseudo-series effect may be executed during the display of the effect symbol variation. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a pseudo-continuous rendering mode. In addition, in FIG. 72, the aspect of an effect screen changes in order of (1) (2) (3) .... In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 72, a case is shown in which pseudo-continuation is performed when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. In the case where the quasi-continuation is performed while the effect symbol variation display is being executed in synchronization with the simulating, the quasi-continuation is executed in the same effect manner.

  In the example shown in FIG. 72, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 72 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command based on the newly received start prize (see step S218A). Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (2), the production control microcomputer 100 displays the first reserved memory number on the first reserved memory display unit 18c based on the received first reserved memory number addition designation command. Increase by 1 (see step S653). Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 72 (1) and 72 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 72 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 72 (4), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 has received a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a chance symbol as a temporary stop symbol of the production symbol based on the reception of the variation pattern command that designates the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-ream. Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (5), when the temporary stop timing of the temporary stop symbol comes, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped. Also in the case shown in FIG. 72 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. In FIG. 72 (5), since the variation is not stopped, the variation display of the fourth symbol is continuously performed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol without stopping the suspension symbol. Is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts re-variation of the production symbol as shown in FIG. 72 (6). In this case, as shown in FIG. 72 (6), a predetermined effect is performed, for example, a display in which a flash is emitted above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of re-variation of the effect symbol. The predetermined effect performed at the start of re-variation is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 72. For example, a movable member (for example, a character or the like) provided above, below or on the side of the effect display device 9 is imitated. A movable object having a shape) may be moved at the start of re-variation, or a predetermined lamp may be turned on or blinked at the start of re-variation. Further, for example, the way of starting the variation of the symbol at the start of re-variation may be different from the normal one. For example, in the case where the left, middle, and right production symbols usually start to change at the same time, the left, middle, and right production symbols start to change at different timings, or once start to change upward (or downward) As shown in FIG. 5, the fluctuation may be started downward (or upward). Conversely, in FIG. 72 (5), the way of temporarily stopping the fluctuation of the symbols may be different from the normal one. For example, the symbols may be temporarily stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, but the symbols may be temporarily stopped in the order of left, middle, and right. In addition, since it is not the case where a new fluctuation | variation is started, as shown to FIG. 72 (6), the display of the 1st pending | holding memory number in the 1st pending | holding memory display part 18c does not change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (7), the effect symbol variation display is executed (see step S8105), and when the temporary stop timing of the next temporary stop symbol is reached as shown in FIG. The symbol is displayed temporarily. In addition, since the variation is not stopped, the variation display of the fourth symbol is continuously executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol without stopping the stop symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts re-variation of the production symbol as shown in FIG. 72 (9). In this case, as shown in FIG. 72 (9), a predetermined effect is performed, for example, a display in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of re-variation of the effect symbol.

  The pseudo-continuous effect is executed by repeatedly executing the temporary stop display of the chance symbol and the re-variation in the above manner. As described above, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” shown in FIG. 68 and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 72 are executed in a common effect mode. Therefore, even if the same aspect of the effect is executed, the player can be given a sense of expectation that it may be a continuous notice effect or may be a pseudo-ream, and the interest in the game can be improved. it can.

  Next, the execution timing of the continuous notice effect will be described. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the continuous notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 73, a case where a new start winning is generated during the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shown. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the case where the continuous notice effect of “the change of the variation form at the time of symbol change” is executed is shown as an example. The timing is the same.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start prize to the first start prize opening 13 or the second start prize opening 14 (see Steps S311 and S313), it performs an effect process upon winning (see Steps S216A and S216B). Execute and determine when winning. In the example shown in FIG. 73, it is assumed that there is a new start prize during the change display A of the effect symbol and the determination at the time of winning is made. Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) is transmitted based on the determination result of the winning determination (see steps S217A and S217B), and a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number). An addition designation command or a second reserved storage number addition designation command) is transmitted (see steps S218A and S218B). In the example shown in FIG. 73, it is assumed that a winning determination result designation command and a pending storage number addition designation command are transmitted after a continuous notice lottery prohibition period to be described later has elapsed.

  The production control microcomputer 100 adds 1 to the reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) based on the reception of the reserved memory number addition designation command (steps S651, S652, S654, S655). reference). In the example shown in FIG. 73, it is assumed that the number of reserved memories before receiving the winning determination result specifying command and the reserved memory number addition specifying command is 3, and the production control microcomputer 100 executes the reserved memory number addition specifying command. Based on the reception, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory number storage area (the first reserved memory number storage area or the second reserved memory number storage area) is incremented by 1 to 4. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a continuous notice effect determining process based on the received winning determination result designation command (see step S800E), and a continuous notice effect determining process (see step S6019). It is assumed that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the production mode. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the current reserved memory number (“4” in the example shown in FIG. 73) in the variation counter (see step S6021). Thereafter, when the variation time of the variation display A is completed, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 to 3 (see step S8312).

  Next, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, a reserved storage number subtraction designation command (a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is received, and the next variation display B is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. Shall. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display B ends, and the chance symbol a is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 73 (see step S8302). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 2 (see step S8312). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, when a new start prize is generated during the fluctuation display A and it is decided to execute the continuous warning effect, the continuous warning effect is started from the next fluctuation display B. Is started, but the continuous notice effect is started immediately from the fluctuation display A being executed (for example, the chance symbol pattern is stopped and displayed when the fluctuation display A is stopped). It may be.

  Further, when starting the next variation display C, the effect control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that the value of the variation number counter is 2, as shown in FIG. The continuous notice effect is continuously executed by performing a predetermined effect b (see step S8108), such as displaying a mode in which a flash shines above the 9 display screen. Then, the variation time of the variation display C ends, and the chance symbol b is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 73 (see step S8302). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 1 (see step S8312).

  Further, when the next variation display D is started, the effect control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that the value of the variation counter is 1, as shown in FIG. The continuous notice effect is continuously executed by performing the predetermined effect c (see step S8108), such as displaying the flash light in the upper part of the 9 display screen. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display D ends, and the chance symbol c is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 73 (see step S8302). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 0 (see step S8312). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the continuous advance notice execution flag that has been set based on the fact that the value of the variation counter has become 0 (see steps S8313 and S8316), and performs the continuous advance notice effect. finish.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, a case where a continuous notice effect is performed during the variation display until the variation display D immediately before the variation display E subject to the determination at the time of winning is shown. However, the continuous notice effect may be executed even during the fluctuation display E that is the target of determination at the time of winning. In this embodiment, since the continuous notice effect is not executed in the variation display E that is the object of determination at the time of winning, the continuous notice effect and the super reach effect are included in one variation display E. Both are executed to prevent the production from becoming too unnatural (especially, the production is surely prevented from becoming too busy just before the end of the variable display). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice effect is executed even during the variable display E that is the target of the determination at the time of winning, the continuous notice effect is executed before the super reach effect in the variable display E is executed. It is only necessary to execute the super reach effect after the notice effect is finished.

  Next, the execution timing of the big hit announcement effect will be described. FIG. 74 is an explanatory view showing the execution timing of the big hit announcement effect. As shown in FIG. 74, the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start prize to the first start prize port 13 or the second start prize port 14 even during the execution of the big hit game (step S311). , S313), winning effect processing (see steps S216A and S216B) is executed to determine the winning time. In the example shown in FIG. 74, it is assumed that the winning determination is made when the variation display based on the new start winning is a big hit. In the example shown in FIG. 74, there is a case where there is a new start win in Round 7 during the big hit game and a determination is made at the time of win, but there was a start win at any timing during the big win game Even in the case, the determination at the time of winning is similarly performed. Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) is transmitted based on the determination result of the winning determination (see steps S217A and S217B), and a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number). An addition designation command or a second reserved storage number addition designation command) is transmitted (see steps S218A and S218B).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process of determining a big hit notice effect at a predetermined timing during the big hit game. In this embodiment, based on the receipt of the command for opening the big prize opening designating round 10 (see steps S3901 and S6500), the process for determining the big hit announcement effect (see steps S6501 to S6509) is executed. The Based on the determination that there is a big hit among the winning judgment results to be stored (assuming that there is no judgment result that is suddenly probable big change), it is decided to execute the notice effect during the big hit. Assume that the notice effect execution flag during the big hit is set. Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the process data for the production during the round according to the production mode of the announcement during the big hit based on the fact that the execution announcement flag during the big hit is set (steps S3908, S3909). 74), as shown in FIG. 74, in the mid-round production of round 10, a big hit notice effect is executed (see step S2904). In this case, for example, the flash lamp 110 is turned on and displayed in such a manner as to flash for a short time, or a character such as a butterfly appears.

  In this embodiment, at the timing of receiving the large winning opening opening designation command for designating round 10, when there is a big hit among the determination results at the time of winning that is stored, the big hit announcement effect is executed. Even if a start prize that becomes a big hit after round 11 occurs, the notice effect during the big hit is not executed. In this way, when a start win that becomes a big hit after round 11 occurs, after the big hit, when the variable display that becomes the big win is executed, the common announcement during the big hit is in common with the big hit announcement effect. When the effect is executed, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed.

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the common notice effect during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 75, the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start prize to the first start prize port 13 or the second start prize port 14 even during the execution of the big hit game (step S311). , S313), winning effect processing (see steps S216A and S216B) is executed to determine the winning time. In the example shown in FIG. 75, it is assumed that the winning determination is made when the variable display based on the new start winning is a big hit. In the example shown in FIG. 75, there is shown a case where there is a new start prize in the round 14 during the big hit game and the prize determination is performed. In this case, although it is determined at the time of winning that a big start win is won, since the execution timing of the big hit notice effect (round 10) has already passed, the big hit notice effect is not executed during the big hit game.

  After that, when the big hit game is finished and the fluctuation display that becomes the big hit is started, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the first to fourth fluctuation display after the big hit game is finished (step S8008). (Refer to Step S8012) Based on the fact that the variable display result is determined to be a big hit (see Step S8011), the big hit common notice execution flag is set (see Step S8012). Then, based on the fact that the big hit common notice execution flag is set in the fluctuation display that becomes the big hit, as shown in FIG. (See steps S8109 and S8110). In this case, for example, the flash lamp 110 is turned on and displayed in a manner that flashes for a short time, or a character such as a butterfly is made to appear.

  In this embodiment, the execution of the continuous notice effect may be limited according to the number of changes after the end of the big hit game. FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing a period during which the continuous notice effect is limited. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, when the big hit game is finished, the gaming state is shifted to the high probability state (see step S166) and is shifted to the high base state (see step S168). The high probability state continues until the 71st fluctuation display after the big hit game ends (see steps S167 and S138 to S140), and the high base state continues until the 70th fluctuation display after the big hit ends. (Refer to steps S169, S142 to S144). Therefore, from the end of the 70th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game to the end of the 71st fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 76, the high probability / low base state is high probability / There is a period of transition to the low base state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, there is a possibility that the notice effect during the big hit is executed for the first to fourth fluctuation displays executed after the big hit. Accordingly, if a continuous announcement effect is executed for the variable display even though the big hit notification effect is executed during the big hit game, the notification effect is executed for any of the variable displays. It becomes difficult to recognize whether it was. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the continuous notice effect is not executed for the first to the fourth fluctuation display executed after the end of the big hit, and any fluctuation display is notified on the contrary. This prevents a situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether the performance has been executed (see steps S6007 and S6008). Note that when the jackpot notice effect is executed regardless of the number of stored memories (that is, the prohibition process in step S6501 is not performed), the first to fourth fluctuation displays executed after the jackpot is ended. Instead of limiting the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect may be restricted with respect to the first to eighth fluctuation displays executed after the end of the big hit.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, in the 71st variation display (the final variation display when the probability variation state ends) executed after the big hit game is finished, the probability change is increased by increasing the ratio of the super reach. The player's sense of expectation for jackpot at the end of the state is increased (see FIGS. 10C and 10D). In such a case, if the continuous notice effect is executed before the super reach effect at the end of the probability change state appears, the player's interest will be attracted too much to the continuous notice effect, and at the end of the probability change state. The player's interest cannot be sufficiently attracted to the appearance of the super reach that appears. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the change display from the change display of the predetermined number of times before the probability change state ends (the 63rd time in this embodiment) to the last time (the 71st time in this embodiment). In the meantime, the continuous notice effect is not executed, and the player's interest in the super reach effect that appears at the end of the probability change state is prevented from decreasing (see steps S6007 and S6008).

  Further, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and displays the variation display. To start. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the continuous notice prohibition flag and the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer (see step S616A), and determines the continuous notice effect until a predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) elapses. Prohibit execution of processing.

  77 and 78 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the continuous notice lottery prohibition period. First, with reference to FIG. 77, a case will be described in which a new start prize is generated and a determination at the time of winning is performed after receiving a reserved memory number subtraction designation command during a variable display. In the example shown in FIG. 77, it is assumed that the number of reserved memories is 3 before the start of the variable display. The production control microcomputer 100 starts the production symbol variation display A based on the reception of the variation pattern command, receives the display result designation command 4 ms after the variation pattern command is received, and further 4 ms elapses. Later, a pending storage number subtraction designation command is received. Further, the number of reserved memories is decremented to 1 based on the start of a new variable display, and the production control microcomputer 100 receives the reserved memory number subtraction designation command and receives the reserved memory number. Is recognized as 2 (see steps S657, S658, S660, S661). In this case, as shown in FIG. 77, even if a new start win occurs during the change display A of the effect symbol, a new start is performed at the timer interruption after receiving the reserved memory number subtraction designation command. When the mouth switch is detected to be on (for example, when it is determined that the start-up switch has been turned on when two timer interruptions are detected continuously, the second on state is detected) In the timer interruption, a determination at the time of winning is performed, and a determination result specifying command at the time of winning and a reserved storage number addition specifying command are transmitted. The production control microcomputer 100 recognizes that the number of reserved memories has become 3 based on the receipt of the reserved memory number addition designation command (see steps S651, S652, S654, S655), and designates the determination result at the time of winning. If it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the command, the current number of reserved memories 3 is set in the variation counter (see step S6021). As already described, in this embodiment, the control is performed so that the continuous notice effect can be executed in the change displays B and C immediately before the change display D that is the target of determination at the time of winning. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 77, the variation display that can execute the continuous notice effect after the variation display A is finished is two variations of the variation display B and the variation display C. In this embodiment, when the variation display is finished, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 (see step S8312), but when the variation display B is started, the value of the variation counter is 2. In particular, the continuous notice effect is executed, and when the variable display C is started, the continuous notice effect is continuously executed based on the fact that the value of the variation counter is 1. Then, when the change display C is ended, the continuous notice execution flag is reset based on the fact that the value of the change counter is 0 (see steps S8313 and S8316), and the continuous notice effect is ended. Therefore, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect is not executed in the variation display D which is the target of the next winning determination.

  On the other hand, with reference to FIG. 78, a case will be described in which a new start win is generated and a determination at the time of winning is performed before receiving the reserved memory number subtraction designation command during the variable display. As in FIG. 77, it is assumed that the number of reserved memories was 3 before the start of the variable display. The production control microcomputer 100 starts the production symbol variation display A based on the reception of the variation pattern command. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, the timing of the next timer interruption after receiving the variation pattern command (the one before receiving the reserved memory count subtraction designation command) during the variation display A of the effect symbol. When a new start-up switch on is detected in the timer interrupt timing (for example, when it is determined that the start-up switch has been turned on when two on-time timer interruptions are detected to be on continuously) When the second on-state is detected), a determination at the time of winning is performed within the timer interruption, and a determination result specifying command at the time of winning and a reserved storage number addition specifying command are transmitted. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 has not yet received the reserved memory number subtraction designation command at this stage, so that the reserved memory number is still recognized as 3 even though the reserved memory number has been consumed by one. It is in a state as it is. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 is in a state of recognizing that the number of reserved memories is erroneously 4 based on the receipt of the reserved memory number addition designation command before the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S651). , S652, S654, S655). If the process of determining the continuous notice effect is performed in such a state, if it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result designation command, the variation counter is erroneously displayed. 4 is set (that is, the number of fluctuations capable of executing the continuous notice effect is the same as in FIG. 77, but one more value is set) (see step S6021). Then, as shown in FIG. 78, even if the variation display C immediately before the variation display D subject to determination at the time of winning is finished, the value of the variation counter does not become 0, and a continuous notice effect can be executed. Even though there are only two fluctuations of the fluctuation displays B and C, the situation where the continuous notice effect is executed also occurs in the fluctuation display D that is the target of the determination at the time of winning. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, a predetermined period (for example, for example, 8 ms) from when the variation pattern command is received until the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received (for example, 8 ms). The determination of the continuous notice effect is prohibited until 32 ms), and the process of determining the continuous notice is performed after the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received and the digestion of the reserved memory number is recognized. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the continuous notice effect is executed beyond the number of fluctuations that can be executed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, a big hit type, and a variation pattern type at the time of starting winning, and the big hit A symbol designating command that can specify the determination result of whether or not the jackpot type and the big hit type and a variation category command that can specify the determination result of the variation pattern type are transmitted. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a pre-reading notice prior to the execution of the variation display subject to the determination at the time of winning based on the symbol designation command and the variation category command transmitted at the time of starting winning. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a pre-reading notice (a big hit notice notice effect) based on the symbol designation command while being controlled to the big hit gaming state. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 is a variable display that is started before the variable display subject to the determination at the time of winning is executed based on the variable category command when not controlled to the big hit gaming state. The pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is executed. With such a configuration, when a game ball passes through the start winning opening 13, 14, a symbol designation command and a variable category command are transmitted together, regardless of whether or not a big hit gaming state is achieved. The pre-reading notice can be executed before the change display subject to time determination is executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to perform control for sending different winning determination result commands depending on whether or not the game is a big hit game state, and the pre-reading notice is made before the variable display subject to winning determination is executed. It is possible to prevent an increase in processing load and program capacity for executing.

  In this embodiment, with regard to the continuous notice effect that is the pre-reading notice that is executed during the variable display, first, in the case of a high probability state, whether to execute the continuous notice effect is roughly determined based on the symbol designation command. (See step S6009), the case where the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the variable category command (see step S6019) has been described. It is not limited to the method shown in the form. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 conversely determines whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect based on the variation pattern type specified by the variation category command, and whether it is a big hit or a small hit specified by the symbol designation command. You may make it determine the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect based on the determination result of whether or not and big hit type. Further, for example, based on the variation pattern type specified by the variation pattern command, whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect may be determined, and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect may be determined.

  In this embodiment, the case where the flash lamp 110 is turned on and displayed in a manner that causes the flash lamp 110 to flash is described as an effect mode of the big hit notice effect. However, the effect mode of the big hit notice effect is described in this embodiment. It is not limited to what is shown. For example, the announcement effect during the big hit may be performed in the same manner as the “mode transition” in the continuous announcement effect, and the different backgrounds may be squeezed from the left and right of the display screen. An effect similar to that of “change in reserved ball” may be performed, and an effect may be performed in which the display of the stored memory determined to be a big hit is displayed in a mode different from normal (for example, star display).

  Also, for example, the display made during the big hit notice effect (except for the above-mentioned “change in the holding ball”) is displayed until the end of the big hit game, and is erased once at the end of the big hit game. When the variable display for the hold storage that is the target of the effect is executed, the fact that the target is the target of the notification effect during the big hit in the variable display may be notified again. If comprised in that way, it can be recognized which change display was the object of the notice effect during a big hit, and it can prevent making a player's distrust.

  For example, a round promotion effect may be executed during a big hit game round. In this case, for example, as shown in this embodiment, when there is a 15R probability variation big hit, a 10R probability variation big hit, and a 2R probability variation big hit, the announcement effect during the big hit is executed in the first round, and further in the second round. You may make it alert | report that it is promoted to jackpot of 10 rounds, and may perform the round promotion effect which alert | reports that it is promoted to jackpot of 15 rounds further in the 10th round. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notice effect during the big hit regardless of the presence or absence of the round promotion effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the announcement effect during the jackpot game is executed only once in a specific round during the jackpot game (round 10 in this example) is shown. The winning determination result stored in the time determination result storage buffer may be scanned to determine whether or not to execute the big hit announcement effect.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the microcomputer 100 for effect control receives a pre-reading notice (provided that it has received a symbol designating command indicating a determination result indicating that it is a big hit (excluding suddenly probable big hit). (Preliminary announcement during the big hit). Therefore, since it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice (preliminary notice during the big hit) only when it is necessary to improve the interest in the game, the processing relating to the execution of the pre-reading notice (preliminary notice during the big hit) is uselessly performed. This can be prevented.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a pre-reading notice (a big hit notice notice effect) at a predetermined timing (round 10) during the big hit gaming state. In addition, when the design control microcomputer 100 receives a symbol designation command indicating a determination result indicating that it is a big hit after a predetermined timing in the big hit gaming state, the fluctuation display determined to be the big hit is executed. The common announcement during the big hit common with the announcement during the big hit is executed. Therefore, even if the jackpot notice effect during the jackpot gaming state is not executed, the common jackpot notice effect common to the jackpot notice effect is executed in the variable display executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. Can be provided. Therefore, the relevance between the effect in the big hit gaming state and the change display executed after the end of the big hit gaming state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a special winning opening open designation command when controlled to the big hit gaming state. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the contents of the symbol designation command and the variable category command transmitted at the time of starting winning in the winning determination result storage buffer up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 8). Also, the production control microcomputer 100 receives a big hit notification based on the contents of the symbol designation command stored in the winning judgment result storage buffer when the big prize opening opening designation command designating the round 10 is transmitted. It is determined whether or not an effect is to be executed, and a notice effect during a big hit is executed based on the determination result. Therefore, if the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the jackpot announcement effect only when the command for opening the big prize opening specifying the round 10 is transmitted, the announcement effect during the jackpot is given. Can be executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot notice effect every time the symbol designation command is transmitted, and the processing load for executing the jackpot notice effect can be reduced.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines to execute the pre-reading notice (notice effect during the big hit), excluding those determined to be “suddenly probable big hit” from the stored memory. To do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading notice (notice effect during the big hit) from being executed for the variable display of the identification information that is “suddenly promising big hit” with a low game value. Therefore, in a game machine that can execute a pre-reading notice (a big hit announcement effect) during a jackpot gaming state and can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state having a different game value, a meaningless look-ahead notice (a big hit announcement effect) is eliminated. Can improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 does not perform the pre-reading notice (the notice effect during the big hit) when there is one determined to be “suddenly probable big hit” during the hold storage. To decide. Therefore, even if a pre-reading advance notice (notice effect during the big hit) is executed for the variable display with a high game value such as “15R probable big hit”, “10R probable big hit”, or “2R probable big hit”, the big hit gaming state is entered. “Suddenly promising big hit” with low gaming value interrupts during the period of time until “15R probable big hit”, “10R probable big hit”, “2R probable big hit”, and the time until the big hit gaming state is prolonged. It is possible to prevent the interest in games from being reduced.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, any of the predetermined number (for example, four) of pending storages is determined based on the winning determination result. The notice effect during the big hit is performed. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 prohibits the execution of the continuous notice effect until the predetermined number (for example, four) of identification information change display ends after the jackpot gaming state ends. Therefore, after the jackpot gaming state is ended, the continuous notice effect can be prevented from being executed during a period in which the variable display that is the subject of the notice effect during the big hit may start. Therefore, in the gaming machine configured to execute the pre-reading notice during the variable display in addition to the big hit gaming state, it is possible to prevent a situation where it becomes difficult to recognize which pre-reading notice is being executed for which variable display. Can improve interest in

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is determined as a winning determination target until the predetermined number (for example, four) of variable display is ended after the jackpot gaming state is ended. Except for the changed display, the execution of the notice effect other than the continuous notice effect is also prohibited. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a notice effect other than the continuous notice effect from being executed during a period in which the variable display subject to the notice effect during the big hit may start. Therefore, it can be recognized more easily which pre-reading notice is executed for which variable display, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, it is executed during a predetermined period before the probability variation state ends (for example, after the end of the 70th variation display after the end of the big hit until the 71st variation display is terminated). Select and execute a super-reach at a high rate. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the continuous notice effect until the predetermined period is ended after the predetermined number of times before the predetermined period is started (for example, the 63rd variable display after the end of the big hit). Ban. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect from being executed on the variable display in the period during which there is a possibility that the super reach effect with high reliability for the big hit gaming state is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) during the variable display, and the player's interest in the highly reliable super reach effect that is executed in a predetermined period before the probability change state ends. Can be attracted and the interest in games can be improved.

  In this embodiment, even when the 63rd to 70th fluctuation display is executed after the end of the big hit, a notice effect other than the continuous notice (for example, step-up notice or mini character notice effect) can be executed. (See steps S8016-S8018). In this case, for example, in the case of executing the 63rd to 70th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit, the notice effect is executed at a different ratio depending on whether or not it is a big hit. The execution rate may be lowered so that the so-called gusset notice is reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs control to execute the effect symbol variation display in the effect display device 9 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result designation command and the number of reserved memories specified by the reserved memory number addition designation command or the reserved memory number subtraction designation command. Thus, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed in a plurality of variable displays that are started before the variable display subjected to the winning determination is executed. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the continuous notice effect based on the decision to execute the continuous notice effect. However, the production control microcomputer 100 controls to prohibit the execution of the process of determining the continuous notice effect during the period from the reception of the variation pattern command to the reception of the reserved memory number subtraction designation command. Therefore, since it is controlled not to determine the execution of the continuous notice effect during the period until the hold memory subtraction designation command is received, the number of executions of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the erroneous number of reserved memories. It is possible to prevent the situation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which an unnatural effect is produced due to a deviation between the number of stored memories and the number of executions of the continuous notice effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the continuous notice allocation tables A and B have the “flash” effect form as the effect of the pre-read notice when it is determined that the “super reach big hit” is determined by the determination at the time of winning. Allocated deterministically. Therefore, by providing a prefetch notice of the “flash” effect mode that is determined to be a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the winning determination for all the variable displays executed until the variable display performed by one right (holding storage) is started. A pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is executed on the condition that it is determined that “non-reach” will occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) becomes difficult to recognize by interrupting and executing the variable display with reach during the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect). The situation where it falls can be prevented. In addition, reach is performed during pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) without performing complicated processing to change the fluctuation pattern and the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern type determination table and fluctuation pattern determination table). It is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect display is interrupted and the continuity of the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is impaired. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased without complicating the process of determining the variation pattern.

  For example, in order to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is impaired, after it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect), the target variable display is started. It is also conceivable that the variation pattern is determined by changing the variation pattern type determination table or the variation pattern determination table so that the reach effect is not performed in the variation display executed before. However, in such a configuration, change processing of the variation pattern type determination table and the variation pattern determination table occurs, and the variation pattern determination processing becomes complicated. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice) is provided on the condition that all the fluctuation displays before starting the fluctuation display subject to the determination at the time of winning are “non-reach”. Since the change pattern type determination table and the change pattern determination table are not required to be changed. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased without complicating the process of determining the variation pattern.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the start winning at the first start winning opening 13, the second winning based on the start winning at the second starting winning opening 14 is performed. Compared to the case where the special symbol variation display is executed, it is decided to make a small hit at a high rate. Therefore, by suppressing the occurrence frequency of the small hit game based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, it can be understood that it was a small hit game despite expecting a sudden probability change big hit game in the high base state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a situation in which the player is discouraged more than necessary is prevented, and a situation in which the player is disadvantaged more than necessary can be prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the deviation variation pattern type determination table to change the variation pattern type of the effect symbol to the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with super reach, It is determined as one of a plurality of variation pattern types including a variation pattern type that does not include a variation pattern with super reach. Then, the variation pattern of the effect design is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. In this case, the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B indicate that the common determination value (for the variation pattern type (super CA2-7) including the variation pattern with super reach, regardless of the total number of pending storages ( 230 to 251) are allocated. Moreover, the variation pattern type tables 135A and 135B for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state are common to the non-reach variation pattern types (non-reach CA2-1) regardless of the total number of pending storages. Determination values (1 to 79) are assigned. Therefore, in the case of executing a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) based on the determination that the super reach is reached, it is possible to prevent inconsistency depending on the number of reserved memories. In addition, the distribution of the variation pattern with super reach and other variation patterns can be easily changed at the design stage.

  For example, in this embodiment, it is premised that the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation of the special symbol and the effect symbol, and the variation display is performed according to the determined variation pattern, but is read into the holding buffer at the timing when the start winning is detected. If the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) includes a random value corresponding to the super reach with high reliability for the big hit, the variation display for the super reach is performed before the variation display is executed. A continuous notice effect is executed. In this case, if the variation pattern type determination table for deviation is designed as in this embodiment, when the continuous notice effect is executed, the change accompanied by the super reach corresponding to the noticed change pattern type is always performed. Since the display is executed, a notice effect corresponding to the variation pattern type can be executed in advance.

  For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-278663, it is described that a variation pattern type is first determined and then one of the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type is determined. There are variation patterns that are included between a plurality of variation pattern types. Therefore, even if the continuous notice effect is executed in advance, other effects such as normal reach may be executed, which may cause distrust to the player. If you try not to give distrust to the player, you will be able to perform only the notice effect that the reach will occur at best (you can not give a notice of a more reliable effect such as super reach) ), The effect of the notice effect will be significantly reduced. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a common determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute a continuous notice effect with higher reliability, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the notice effect without giving distrust to the player.

  In addition, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-278663 includes a variation pattern that exists in common among the variation pattern types. For this reason, the work for distributing a specific variation pattern such as a super reach variation pattern and other variation patterns at the design stage becomes complicated. That is, even if it is desired to change only the selection ratio of a specific fluctuation pattern without changing the selection ratio of each fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation pattern type within the fluctuation pattern type, the selection ratio within a plurality of fluctuation pattern types Therefore, the appearance rate of the variation pattern differs between the variation pattern types. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a specific variation pattern such as a variation pattern of super reach and other variation patterns are configured not to exist in common among a plurality of variation pattern types. The appearance rate of the variation pattern can be easily changed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for detachment has different determination values for the variation pattern types including variation patterns other than super reach (normal reach and non-reach) depending on the total number of pending storages. Assigned. For example, in this embodiment, the variation pattern of the shortening variation is included only in the variation pattern type determination table for shortening (for shortening) 135B (see FIG. 10B) selected when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. A variation pattern type (non-reach CA2-3) including (non-reach PA1-2) is selected. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories (in this example, the total number of reserved memories) is large, the operating rate can be improved by shortening the fluctuation time by averaging. That is, if a lot of fluctuation display with a long fluctuation time, such as super reach, is executed when the reserved memory is accumulated, the reserved memory is not easily digested, and there is a possibility that an invalid start winning will occur. When the number of reserved memories is large, the operating time is improved by averaging the fluctuation time and shortening. On the other hand, when there is a small amount of reserved memory, if the fluctuation time is short, the reserved memory is quickly consumed and the variable display is interrupted. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the number of reserved storage is small, by shortening fluctuation, the fluctuation time is averaged and lengthened so that the fluctuation display is not easily interrupted. Therefore, in this embodiment, inconsistency does not occur depending on the number of reserved storages, while the variable display is not easily interrupted.

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the display of the effect symbols is started and the display result is derived and displayed, the effect symbols temporarily stopped are temporarily stopped, and then the effect symbols are variablely displayed again. A plurality of types of quasi-continuous fluctuation patterns (non-reach PA1-4, normal PB2-1, normal PB2-2, super PA3-1, super PA3-2, normal PB2-3, Normal PB2-4, super PA3-3, super PA3-4, and special PG1-3). Then, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is executed in the same manner as when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. For this reason, even when an effect of the same effect mode is executed, it is possible to expect the possibility of both a case where a pseudo-ream effect is executed and a case where a pre-reading notice is executed. Can improve interest in

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, after one reserved memory is stored as the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory, a plurality of effect symbols until the variable display performed by the one reserved memory is started. The pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is executed over the variable display. Then, the chance effect symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the effect symbol until the variable display performed by the one hold memory is started, and the next effect until the variable display performed by the one hold memory is started. A predetermined effect (for example, display in such a manner that a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of effect symbol variation) is executed when symbol variation display is started. Therefore, it is necessary to make time adjustments such as stopping the chance eye symbol early when executing the pre-reading advance notice (continuous notice effect) of the effect mode using the derivation display of the chance eye symbol and the execution of the predetermined effect. It is possible to eliminate such a situation that the process of deriving and displaying the chance symbol and the process of executing the predetermined effect overlap to cause a lack of processing. For example, in order to perform an effect similar to the above, during a single variation display, first the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, and then a predetermined effect (for example, the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of the variation of the effect symbol) If the change display is terminated by executing the display of a mode in which a flash is lit above the above, a continuous notice effect similar to that in FIG. 68 can be executed. However, such control requires processing such as temporarily stopping the chance symbol display slightly earlier than the end time of the variable display, and requires time adjustment until the end time of the variable display. Therefore, in this embodiment, the predetermined effect is executed at the start of the next variable display during the continuous notice effect, so that the continuous notice effect in the effect mode shown in FIG. It is possible to execute without doing.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern type is determined according to a common process when displaying. The game control microcomputer 560 is common when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a and when the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 8b. According to the process, the variation pattern of the effect design is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. Therefore, in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of special symbol displays, the capacity of a storage area for storing a program and data for determining a variation pattern can be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to make a big hit, and has a high game value such as “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, It is determined before the derivation display of the display result whether the value is “suddenly promising big hit” with low value. Then, which jackpot is shifted at different ratios when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b To decide. Therefore, the game value of the game state to be transferred can be varied depending on which special symbol variable display is executed, and the progress of the game can be diversified.

  Further, according to this embodiment, at the time of the start winning prize before the start of the change, the game control microcomputer 560 determines in advance whether or not the change pattern of the effect pattern becomes a change pattern with super reach. . Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that it becomes super reach before the variable display of the production symbol determined to be super reach is started based on the determination at the time of winning when super reach is reached. It is possible to execute an effect to notify. For this reason, it is possible to notify that it will be super reach before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the variation pattern by determining the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination table for detachment. In this case, in the deviation variation pattern type determination table, a common determination value (230 to 251) is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the total number of pending storages. . Further, in the variation pattern type determination table for loss, different determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types including variation patterns other than super reach (normal reach and non-reach) according to the total number of pending storage. Therefore, by assigning the ratio of the determination value to the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variable display time as the total number of pending storage increases, the operating rate of the variable display decreases. It can be prevented as much as possible.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram of a determination value assignment state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table. In this embodiment, when the total number of reserved storage is 3 or more, the variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss shown in FIG. 10B is used, and the total number of reserved storage is 0 to 2 (3 or less). In this case, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 10A is used (see steps S96 to S98). As shown in FIG. 54, when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the ratio is less (normal reach, super reach) than when the total pending storage number is 0-2. When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, as shown in FIG. 10 (B), the non-reach CA2-2 variation pattern type is selected and the non-reach PA1-2 is a variation pattern of shortened variation. Since the average fluctuation time is shortened as the total number of pending storage increases, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variable display operating rate is reduced as much as possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, a common determination value (230˜) is used for the variation pattern type with super reach (super reach A, super reach B) regardless of the total number of pending storage. 251) is assigned. Therefore, at the time of starting winning, it is possible to easily determine in advance whether or not it will be super reach if only the value of the extracted random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) is confirmed. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, the case where the distribution of the determination values of the variation pattern type determination table for detachment is different for the two types of the total pending storage number being 0 to 2 or 3 or more is shown. The method of differentiating the determination values in the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the distribution may be made more finely stepwise according to the total number of pending storage. In this case, for example, the deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0, 1 and the offset for the total pending storage count 2, the total pending storage count 3 and the total pending storage count 4 A variation pattern type determination table may be prepared in advance, and the distribution of the variation pattern type with reach and the variation pattern type of the shortened variation may be further varied in stages. In addition to such an example, various combinations of the deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared in advance are conceivable. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4... May be used.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, a completely common determination value (230 to 251) is assigned to the variation pattern type with super reach (super reach A, super reach B) regardless of the total number of pending storage. However, the determination value for super reach in one of the deviation variation pattern type determination table may include the determination value for super reach in the other variation pattern type determination table for deviation. . FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram illustrating another example of determination value assignment states in the deviation variation pattern type determination table.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 80, when the total reserved memory number is 3 or more, the determination values 230 to 251 are assigned to the variation pattern types with super reach, whereas the total reserved memory number 0 to In the case of 2, determination values 200 to 251 are assigned to the variation pattern types with super reach. However, even in such a case, when the value of the extracted random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) is in the range of at least 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning, it becomes easy to become super reach beforehand. Can be determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, among the determination values 0 to 199 assigned to the non-reach variation pattern type when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the range of the determination values 100 to 199 Are not included in the range 0 to 99 of the determination value assigned to the non-reachable variation pattern type when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2. On the other hand, the range 230 to 251 of the determination value assigned to the variation pattern type with super reach when the total pending storage number is 3 or more indicates the super value when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2. All of the determination value ranges 200 to 251 assigned to the variation pattern types with reach are included. Therefore, when the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of at least 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning a prize, it can be easily determined in advance that it will be super reach.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 80, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the determination values 100 to 199 are assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach, and when the total pending storage number is 3 or more. The determination values 200 to 229 are assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach, and the ranges to which the determination values are assigned to the variation patterns with normal reach are not overlapped. The range of determination values assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach may be overlapped between the case and three or more cases. For example, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the determination values 100 to 199 are assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach, and when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the variation pattern type with normal reach is assigned. On the other hand, the determination values 180 to 229 may be assigned. Even in the case of such a configuration, some of the determination values 180 to 229 among the determination values 180 to 229 assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Only the range of 199 is included in the range of determination values 100 to 199 assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach when the combined pending storage number is 0 to 2.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case has been shown in which a variation pattern type with a super reach is used as a collective variation pattern type, and a variation pattern type determination table for deviation is configured. However, for each super reach type (for example, super reach A and The variation pattern type may be divided into super reach B). FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing still another example of the determination value assignment state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 81, determination values 230 to 237 are assigned to the variation pattern type with super reach A regardless of the total number of pending storage, and the variation pattern type with super reach B is assigned. Determination values 237 to 251 are assigned. However, even in such a case, if the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning, it is easily determined in advance that it will be super reach. can do. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, even when the deviation variation pattern type determination table is configured as shown in FIG. 81, the distribution of the determination values of super reach A and super reach B may be different for each table. As in the modification shown in FIG. 4, for example, the determination value for super reach A and B in one deviation variation pattern type determination table is the determination value for super reach A and B in the other variation pattern type determination table for deviation. It may be included. Moreover, you may comprise so that allocation of the judgment value with respect to the super reach A and the super reach B may partially overlap between tables. This can be similarly applied to both this embodiment and each modification shown in this embodiment.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach includes the variation pattern with pseudo-continuity. Therefore, even when the effect of notifying that it will be a super reach is not executed, the variable display with the pseudo-ream can be performed, so that the expectation for becoming a big hit gaming state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when determining a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations as a variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach, when the total number of pending storage is small, In comparison, a variation pattern having a large number of pseudo-variation re-variation execution times is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which variable display accompanied by a pseudo-ream with a large number of re-variations is performed when the total number of reserved storage is large (when the stored storage is accumulated), and the variable display operating rate Can be further prevented.

  FIG. 82 shows the assignment state of the determination value in the variation pattern type determination table for detachment when looking at the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with pseudo-continuity as the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. It is explanatory drawing shown. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, based on the determination value being in the range of 215 to 229 as the variation pattern type including the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. Then, the variation pattern type of normal CA2-6 is selected (see FIG. 10B). Then, as shown in FIG. 82, the fluctuation pattern of the normal PB2-1 accompanied by a pseudo-ream with the number of re-variations of 1 is selected (see FIGS. 12 and 6). On the other hand, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, normal CA2 based on the determination value being in the range of 170 to 229 as the variation pattern type including the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. A variation pattern type of −5 is selected (see FIG. 10A). Then, as shown in FIG. 82, the fluctuation pattern of the normal PB2-2 accompanied by the pseudo-ream with the number of re-variations of 2 is selected (see FIGS. 12 and 6).

  As shown in FIG. 82, even when the effect of notifying that it will be super reach is not executed, there is a case where variable display with pseudo-ream may be performed, so that the expectation for becoming a big hit gaming state is increased. Can improve the interest of the game. Also, as shown in FIG. 82, when variable display with pseudo-continuations is performed, when the total number of pending storages is as small as 0 to 2, variable display with two re-variations of pseudo-continuations is executed. When the number of reserved memories is as large as 3 or more, variable display with a pseudo-continuity with a small number of re-variations is performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which variable display accompanied by a pseudo-ream with a large number of re-variation execution times is frequently performed when the total number of reserved storage is large (when the stored storage is accumulated), It is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation rate of variable display is lowered.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern with pseudo-continuity and a variation without pseudo-continuation as a specific variable display pattern. (See super CA2-7 in FIGS. 6 and 12), but the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 is only accompanied by super reach. And a variation pattern that does not involve pseudo-continuations may be included. Further, even when a variation pattern with pseudo-ream is used together with super reach, the range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern that has only super reach and does not involve pseudo ream as a specific variable display pattern. Variation pattern types that include only quasi-continuous and super-reach and quasi-continuous variation patterns, normal reach and quasi-continuous variation pattern types, and non-reach and variability pattern types that involve quasi-continuation. May be assigned to a range other than the determination values 230 to 251 as a variation pattern type including a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream is determined as a variation pattern with super reach, the number of re-variation executions is not less than a predetermined number (three in this embodiment). It is possible to determine a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream. In addition, when a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity is determined as a variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach, the number of re-variation executions is less than a predetermined number (one or two in this embodiment). It is possible to determine a variation pattern with ream. Therefore, by executing a quasi-ream whose number of re-variations is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), the player can have a sense of expectation that it may become super reach. Can be improved.

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing an assignment state of determination values in the deviation variation pattern type determination table when attention is paid to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations. In this embodiment, the super CA 2-7 variation pattern type with super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage (see FIG. 10). . Then, as shown in FIG. 82, super PA3-1 to super PA3-2, which is a fluctuation pattern with a pseudo-continuity with three re-variations, may be selected (see FIGS. 12 and 6). On the other hand, when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the variation pattern type of normal CA 2-6 that does not become super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 215 to 229 (FIG. 10 ( B)). Then, as shown in FIG. 82, the normal PB2-1, which is a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity with one revariation count, may be selected (see FIGS. 12 and 6). When the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the variation pattern type of normal CA 2-5 that does not become super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 170 to 229 (FIG. 10). (See (A)). Then, as shown in FIG. 82, the normal PB2-2, which is a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuation with the number of re-variations twice, may be selected (see FIGS. 12 and 6).

  As shown in FIG. 83, by executing the pseudo-ream with the number of re-variations of 3 or more, the player can have a sense of expectation that it may become super reach, and the interest in the game is increased. Can be improved.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 includes three pseudo-variations as a specific variable display pattern. A variation pattern with reaming is included, and a variation pattern with one or two re-variations is included as a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern in a range other than that. This shows a case where the display pattern and a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern include a variation pattern with a pseudo-series that does not overlap the number of re-variations. May be. For example, the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern with re-variation 3 to 5 pseudo-continuations as a specific variable display pattern. A variable pattern other than the specific variable display pattern may be included in a range other than that including a variation pattern with re-variation 1 to 3 pseudo-continuations.

  It should be noted that any variation pattern with any type of super reach within the range to which the variation pattern type with super reach in the deviation variation pattern type determination table (the range to which the determination values 230 to 251 are allocated) is assigned. It is not limited to what is shown in this embodiment whether it is assigned or how much the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-continuous is assigned. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of assignment in a range in which a variation pattern type with super reach is assigned.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), not all types of reach are allocated, but among the reach with high reliability for some jackpots (for example, super reach C in super reach A to C). Those with pseudo-continuations and having a large number of pseudo-continuations (for example, four times) may be collectively assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), regardless of the type of reach, all the reach (for example, super reach A to super reach C) is accompanied by a pseudo run, and the number of pseudo runs. Those having a large number may be collectively assigned to a range of determination values 230 to 251. Furthermore, for example, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), in addition to the fluctuation pattern of only super reach (for example, super reach A and not accompanied by pseudo-continuous), the pseudo-ream is associated with the number of pseudo continuouss. Many variation patterns may be assigned to a range of determination values 230 to 251 as specific variation patterns.

  In this embodiment, the case of using two types of reach, that is, super reach A and super reach B, is shown as the super reach. You may comprise so that a super reach may be performed. For example, when the super reach C is configured to be executable in addition to the super reach A and B as shown in FIG. 84, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs the process similar to that of this embodiment in accordance with the processing shown in FIG. Super CA 3-3, which is a variation pattern type for super reach, from the variation pattern type determination table for jackpots shown in (A) and (B) and the variation pattern type determination table for loss shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and (B). And Super CA2-7 will be decided. Then, the super CA 3-3 and the super CA 2-7, which are the variation patterns for super reach, are each configured to include the variation patterns with super reach A to C, and the super reach is determined based on the determined variation pattern types. A variation pattern involving any one of A to C may be determined.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is determined to be a big hit, a variation pattern with a super reach is made at a higher rate than when it is decided not to be a big hit. For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when it is determined to be out of place, the determination value is assigned only to a narrow range of 230 to 251 with respect to the super reach, whereas FIGS. As shown in (2), when it is determined to be a big hit, a determination value is assigned to a super reach over a wide range of 150 to 251 or 80 to 251. Therefore, the expectation to the big hit gaming state when variable display with super reach is performed can be enhanced, and the interest in gaming can be further improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is determined that the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach is a variation pattern with normal reach or a non-reach variation pattern. Therefore, even when variable display with super reach is not performed, variable display with normal reach can be executed, giving a sense of expectation that it may be a big hit gaming state. Further improvement can be achieved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with super reach or the variation pattern type not including the variation pattern with super reach as the variation pattern type. Decide on. Then, when it is determined that the variable display pattern type of the effect symbol is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach, it is determined that the variation pattern of the effect symbol is a variation pattern with super reach. Therefore, the distribution between the variation pattern with super reach and the variation pattern other than that can be easily changed at the design stage only by changing the distribution of the variation pattern type.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and in particular, each can be identified based on the fact that a start condition that allows the start of variable display is satisfied after the game medium passes through the start area. A variable display unit that starts variable display of multiple types of identification information and derives and displays the display result is specified based on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display unit based on a predetermined display result. It is preferably applied to a gaming machine that is in a gaming state.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
110 Flash lamp

Claims (7)

After the game medium has passed through the start area, variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other is started on the basis that a start condition that allows the start of variable display is satisfied, and the display result is derived and displayed In a gaming machine that includes a display unit and is in a specific gaming state based on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display unit being a predetermined specific display result,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means includes
Numerical data extraction means for extracting specific gaming state determination numerical data for determining whether or not to enter the specific gaming state based on the passing of the game medium through the starting area;
The specific game state extracted by the numerical data extraction means for a variable display of the identification information in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium passes through the start area, up to a predetermined upper limit number Hold storage means for storing determination numerical data as hold storage;
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the display result of the variable display of the identification information as to whether or not to enter the specific game state using the specific game state determination numerical data stored in the holding storage means Means for determining the start time before the derivation is displayed,
When the game medium passes through the start area, the specific game is determined using the specific game state determination numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area. Starting time determination means for determining whether or not a state is reached,
The production control means includes
On the basis of the determination result by the start time determination means, an effect execution control means for performing control to execute an effect corresponding to the variable display of the identification information;
Prior notice effect execution means for executing a prior notice effect before the variable display of the identification information subjected to the determination by the start time determination means is executed,
The prior notice effect execution means includes:
When being controlled to the specific game state, based on the determination result by the start time determination unit, the specific game state as the advance notice effect for any of a predetermined number of hold memories stored by the hold storage unit A notice effect execution means during a specific gaming state for executing a medium notice effect;
This is started before the variable display of the identification information subject to determination by the start time determination means is executed based on the determination result by the start time determination means when not controlled to the specific gaming state. In the variable display of the identification information, including a variable display notice effect execution means for executing a variable display notice effect as the prior notice effect,
The effect control means further includes the variable display notice effect during the variable display by the variable display notice effect executing means after the specific gaming state is ended and until the predetermined number of the identification information variable display is ended. A game machine characterized by including a notice display prohibition means during variable display that prohibits execution of the game. The production control means
Notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect other than the advance notice effect;
The notice effect prohibiting means for prohibiting the execution of the notice effect by the notice effect executing means until the variable display of the predetermined number of pieces of identification information is ended after the specific gaming state is ended. Game machines. The starting time determining means determines that the specific gaming state is set on the condition that the numerical data for determining the specific gaming state stored in the holding storage means matches the specific determination value,
In the specific gaming state, the notice effect execution means includes that the numerical data for determining the specific gaming state stored in the holding storage means is determined to match the specific determination value by the starting time determination means. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a notice effect during a specific gaming state is executed as a condition. The notice effect execution means during the specific game state executes the notice effect during the specific game state at a predetermined timing during the specific game state,
The effect control means, when it is determined that the specific determination value matches with the specific determination value after the predetermined timing in the specific game state, the specific game determined to match the specific determination value Common notice effect that executes a notice effect common to the notice effect during the specific game state executed by the notice effect execution means during the specific game state when the variable display of the identification information based on the numerical data for state determination is executed The gaming machine according to claim 3, comprising execution means. The game control means
Prior to the determination by the start time determination means, a start time command transmission means for transmitting a determination result command that can specify the determination result of the start time determination means;
A command transmission means during a specific game state for transmitting a command during a specific game state when controlled to the specific game state,
The production control means
A determination result command storage means for storing the content of the determination result command transmitted by the start time command transmission means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
When the specific gaming state command transmission means is transmitted by the specific gaming state command transmission means, based on the content of the determination result command stored in the determination result command storage means, the notice effect during the specific gaming state is executed. Including a notice effect determining means during a specific gaming state for determining whether or not,
The specific game state notice effect executing means executes the specific game state notice effect based on the fact that the specific game state notice effect determining means determines to execute the specific game state notice effect. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4. The numerical data extracting means is a numerical value for determining the effect mode for determining the effect mode of the effect corresponding to the variable display of the identification information together with the numerical data for determining the specific gaming state based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area. Extract the data,
The hold storage means is extracted by the numerical data extraction means for a variable display of the identification information for which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium passes through the start area, up to a predetermined upper limit number. Storing the production mode determination numerical data together with the specific gaming state determination numerical data as a hold storage;
The game control means
Based on the establishment of the start condition, using the production mode determination numerical data stored in the holding storage means, and a judgment value table in which judgment values are set for a plurality of types of production modes, An effect stage determination means at start time for determining an effect mode corresponding to the variable display of the identification information from a plurality of types of effect modes before the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed,
When the game medium passes through the start area, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area, the presentation mode determining numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means and the determination value are used. And a start-up production mode determination means for determining whether or not the production mode of the production corresponding to the variable display of the identification information is a specific production mode among a plurality of types of production modes.
The variable display notice effect executing means executes variable display of the identification information determined to be the specific effect mode based on the start effect mode determining unit being determined to be the specific effect mode. In the variable display of the identification information that is started before being performed, a notice display effect during variable display is executed,
The judgment value table is
For the specific effect mode, a common determination value is set regardless of the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means,
The determination value which differs according to the number of reservation memories which the said storage means memorize | stores is set with respect to presentation aspects other than the said specific production aspect. Gaming machine. The start-time effect mode determination means sets the effect mode of the effect corresponding to the variable display of the identification information on the condition that the numerical value data for effect mode determination stored in the hold storage means matches a predetermined determination value. Decided to be a predetermined production mode that suggests that there is a high possibility of becoming a specific gaming state compared to the production mode,
The effect execution control means can execute an effect corresponding to the variable display of the identification information in the predetermined effect mode, based on the determination result by the start time effect mode determination unit.
The variable display advance notice effect execution means includes, in addition to the effect mode determination numerical data that is the object of determination by the start time effect mode determination means, in the effect mode determination numerical data stored in the hold storage means. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein a notice display effect during variable display is executed on condition that there is no match with a predetermined determination value.

Images